< Назад | Содержимое | Далее >

TRANSMISSION

Automatic Transmission - 5ET50 (MKV) - Volt

SPECIFICATIONS

TEMPERATURE VERSUS RESISTANCE (TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR)



Temperature


Temperature

Minimum Resistance

Nominal Resistance

Maximum Resistance

°C

°F

-50

-58

71455

77458

83641

-40

-40

40,221

43,321

46,422

-30

-22

23,515

25,155

26,794

-20

-4

14,228

15,126

16,023

-10

14

8,881

9,388

9,894

0

32

5,704

5,997

6,291

10

50

3,759

3,934

4,108

20

68

2,537

2,643

2,749

30

86

1,750

1,816

1,882

40

104

1,232

1,274

1,315

50

122

883

910

937

60

140

645

662

679

70

158

478

489

500

80

176

360

367

376

90

194

275

280

284

100

212

212

216

219

110

230

166

168

170

120

248

132

133

134

130

266

105

106

107

140

284

84

86

87

150

302

69

70

71

FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS (OFF-VEHICLE)

Single Use Non-Threaded Fasteners/Components

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.

Application

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Seal

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.

Application

Automatic Transmission Pump Fluid Outlet Seal

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Gasket

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Inner Seal

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Outer Seal

Control Valve Lower Body Spacer Plate

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring

Drive Motor Support

Manual Shift Shaft Pin

Transmission Fluid Level Hole Plug

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal

Variable High Clutch Fluid Seal Ring

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal

Variable High Clutch Housing Seal

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Inner Seal

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Outer Seal

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Retaining Ring

Variable High Clutch Piston Inner Seal

Variable High Clutch Piston Outer Seal


Single Use Threaded Fastener/Component Tightening Specifications

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.


Application

Reference number

from Disassembled Views


Quantity


Size

Specification

Metric (English)

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

230

1

M8 x 38.5

38 N.m (28 lb ft)

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.


Application

Reference number from Disassembled

Views


Quantity


Size

Specification

Metric (English)

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

252

1

M8 x 55.8

38 N.m (28 lb ft)

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt

image First Pass

305

6

M10 x 31.05

58 N.m (35 lb ft)

image Final Pass

305

6

M10 x 31.05

37.5 Degrees

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

502

4

M6 x 15.5

5 N.m (44 lb in)

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

522

4

M6 x 15.5

5 N.m (44 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Bolt

231

2

M6 x 21

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Stator Bolt

509

4

M6 x 55

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Drive Motor Stator Bolt

529

4

M6 x 80.75

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications

NOTE:

All fasteners listed in this table can be reused after removal.


Application

Reference number from Disassembled

Views


Quantity


Size

Specification

Metric (English)

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

238

2

M8 x 35.7

38 N.m (28 lb ft)

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

247

4

M8 x 60.8

26 N.m (19 lb ft)

Automatic Transmission Case Plug

68

1

1/8"-27

NPTF

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Bolt

202

1

M6 x 20

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Hole Plug

66

1

1/8"-27

NPTF

11 N.m (97 lb in)

NOTE:

All fasteners listed in this table can be reused after removal.


Application

Reference number

from Disassembled Views


Quantity


Size

Specification

Metric (English)

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug

57

1

1/8"-27

NPTF

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug

59

1

1/8"-27

NPTF

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Bolt

209

3

M8 x 35

22 N.m (16 lb ft)

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Bolt

240

1

M6 x 25

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Connector Bracket Bolt

709

2

M6 x 20

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Link Snubber Bolt

210

2

M6 x 30

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Link Snubber Bolt

212

2

M6 x 25

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolt

28

4

M6 x 26

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Buss Bar Bolt

30

6

M6 x 25

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt

504

3

M6 x 35

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt

524

3

M6 x 35

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Bolt

22

7

M6 x 25

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Bolt

242

2

M6 x 25

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt

9

1

M6 x 23

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Front Differential Carrier Baffle Bolt

204

2

M6 x 25

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring

706

1

M6 x 25.65

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Park Pawl Actuator Guide Bolt

700

1

M6 x 35

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt

60

16

M8 x 30

32 N.m (24 lb ft)

Transmission Fluid Drain Plug

67

1

1/8"-27

NPTF

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Valve Body Bolt

5

4

M6 x 72

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Valve Body Bolt

8

13

M6 x 45

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Valve Body Cover Bolt

1

16

M6 x 30

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Bolt

25

17

M6 x 30

9 N.m (80 lb in)

NOTE:

All fasteners listed in this table can be reused after removal.


Application

Reference number

from Disassembled Views


Quantity


Size

Specification

Metric (English)

Variable High Clutch Housing Bolt

637

8

M6 x 16

9 N.m (80 lb in)

FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS (ON-VEHICLE)

Single Use Non-Threaded Fasteners/Components

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.

Application

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal - Left

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal - Right

Main Shift Shaft Seal

Single Use Threaded Fastener/Component Tightening Specifications

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.


Application

Specification

Metric (English)

Transmission Mount Bolt (1)

image First Pass:

100 N.m (74 lb ft)

image Final Pass:

60-75 Degrees

Transmission Mount Bolt (2)

image First Pass:

100 N.m (74 lb ft)

NOTE:

All fasteners/components listed in this table MUST BE DISCARDED and

replaced with NEW after removal.


Application

Specification

Metric (English)

image Final Pass:

60-75 Degrees

Transmission Mount Strut Bolt

image First Pass:

100 N.m (74 lb ft)

image Final Pass:

60-75 Degrees

Transmission Mount Strut Bracket Bolt

image First Pass:

75 N.m (55 lb ft)

image Final Pass:

45-60 Degrees

Transmission Mount Transmission Side Bracket Bolt

image First Pass:

58 N.m (43 lb ft)

image Final Pass:

60-75 Degrees

Reusable Threaded Fastener Tightening Specifications

NOTE:

All fasteners listed in this table can be reused after removal.


Application

Specification

Metric (English)

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Control Valve Body Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Control Valve Body Bolt @ Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Control Valve Body Cover Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Buss Bar Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

NOTE:

All fasteners listed in this table can be reused after removal.


Application

Specification

Metric (English)

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Engine Wiring Harness Bracket Nut

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Bolt

22 N.m (17 lb ft)

Engine Wiring Harness Stud

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Ground Cable Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Heater Inlet Hose Bracket Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bolt

22 N.m (17 lb ft)

Main Shaft Bolt, Nut

7 N.m (62 lb in)

Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring Bolt

12 N.m (106 lb in)

Torque Converter Bolt

60 N.m (44 lb ft)

Transmission Control Lever Housing Bracket Nut

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Transmission to Engine Bolts

58 N.m (43 lb ft)

Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt

22 N.m (17 lb ft)

Transmission Fluid Drain Plug

11 N.m (97 lb in)

Transmission Mount Transmission Side Bolt

58 N.m (43 lb ft)

Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Bolt

22 N.m (17 lb ft)

Transmission Range Selector Lever Nut

30 N.m (22 lb ft)

Wiring Harness Bracket Bolt

9 N.m (80 lb in)

APPROXIMATE FLUID CAPACITIES



Application

Specification

Metric

English

5ET50

Fluid Change - Drain Plug - Approximate Capacity

3.2 liters

3.4 quarts

Overhaul - Approximate Capacity (Includes Cooling System)

6.75 liters

7.13 quarts

TRANSMISSION GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS


Name

5ET50

RPO Codes

MKV

Production Location

Warren, Michigan

Transmission Drive

Front Wheel Drive Transaxle

One-Motor EV Drive (CD)

Motor-Generator B provide or absorb vehicle torque for electric only


Two-Motor EV Drive (CD)

Motor-Generator B and Motor-Generator A combine to provide or absorb vehicle torque for electric only

Name

5ET50


operation


Extended Range Low (Mode 1) (CS)

Online optimizer balances engine, Motor-Generator A, and Motor-Generator B, to achieve the most efficient vehicle operation at lower vehicle speeds


Extended Range High (Mode 2) (CS)

Online optimizer balances engine, Motor-Generator A, and Motor-Generator B, to achieve the most efficient

vehicle operation at higher vehicle speeds


Fixed Ratio Extended Range (CS)

Motor/Generator B will be able to electrically boost or regenerate the vehicle torque in parallel with the engine torque. Motor/Generator A is locked to the case and not

contribute to torque

Pressure Tap

Line Pressure

Transmission Fluid Type

DEXRON VI®

Transmission Type: Electric

Electrically Variable

Transmission Type: EV

MKV: 48 kW (Drive Motor A (1) and 87 kW (Drive Motor B (2) Internal Motor

Transmission Type: T

Transaxle Mount

Transmission Type: 50

Product Series

Position Quadrant

P, R, N, D, L

Case Material

Die Cast Aluminum

Transmission Net Weight (Wet)

119 kg (262 pounds)

Maximum Trailer Towing Capacity

MKV: N/A

ADHESIVES, FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND SEALERS


Application

Type of Material

GM Part Number

Automatic Transmission Fluid

DEXRON®VI

Refer to Electronic Parts Catalog

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

Threadlocker Red

Refer to Electronic Parts Catalog

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Bolt

Threadlocker Blue

Refer to Electronic Parts Catalog

CLUTCH BACKING PLATE RETAINING RING SPECIFICATIONS

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Clutch Pack Travel Specification - 0.98 - 1.54 mm (0.039 - 0.061 in)

Retaining Ring Thickness


Ring Identification Color

Metric

English

NOTE:

After measuring clutch pack travel, determine if the

Clutch Pack Travel Specification - 0.98 - 1.54 mm (0.039 - 0.061 in)

Retaining Ring Thickness


Ring Identification Color

Metric

English

measurement is within the specification. If the measurement is not within the specification, measure the thickness of the existing retaining ring, and then choose a thicker or thinner retaining ring that will bring the measurement within specification.

1.40 - 1.50 mm

0.055 - 0.059 in

Dark Green

1.70 - 1.80 mm

0.067 - 0.071 in

Yellow

2.01 - 2.11 mm

0.079 - 0.083 in

No Color

2.31 - 2.41 mm

0.091 - 0.095 in

Light Blue

2.62 - 2.72 mm

0.103 - 0.107 in

Orange

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Clutch Pack Travel Specification - 0.90 - 1.46 mm (0.035 - 0.057 in)

Retaining Ring Thickness


Ring Identification Color

Metric

English

NOTE:

After measuring clutch pack travel, determine if the measurement is within the specification. If the measurement is not within

Clutch Pack Travel Specification - 0.90 - 1.46 mm (0.035 - 0.057 in)

Retaining Ring Thickness


Ring Identification Color

Metric

English

the specification, measure the thickness of the existing retaining ring, and then choose a thicker or thinner retaining ring that will bring the measurement within specification.

2.55 - 2.85 mm

0.100 - 0.112 in

Dark Green

2.87 - 2.97 mm

0.113 - 0.117 in

Yellow

3.20 - 3.30 mm

0.126 - 0.130 in

Purple

3.52 - 3.62 mm

0.139 - 0.143 in

Light Blue

3.85 - 3.95 mm

0.152 - 0.156 in

Orange

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE DAMPENER THRUST WASHER SPECIFICATIONS


Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Calculation Specification - Dimension B Min 47.870 - Max 49.620 mm - Dimension A Min 33.165 - Max 34.465 mm

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Thickness


Ring Identification Color

Dimension B - Dimension A Calculation Range

Metric

English

NOTE:

Measure the thickness of the torque dampener and differential housing gasket and subtract from measured dimension A to use as dimension A in

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Calculation Specification - Dimension B Min 47.870 - Max 49.620 mm - Dimension A Min 33.165 - Max 34.465 mm

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Thickness


Ring Identification Color

Dimension B - Dimension A Calculation Range

Metric

English

calculation.

1.892 - 1.992 mm

0.0745 - 0.0784 in

Red

13.712 - 14.033 mm

2.214 - 2.314 mm

0.0872 - 0.0911 in

Light Grey

14.034 - 14.355 mm

2.536 - 2.636 mm

0.0998 - 0.1038 in

Blue

14.356 - 14.677 mm

2.858 - 2.958 mm

0.1125 - 0.1165 in

Natural

14.678 - 14.999 mm

3.180 - 3.280 mm

0.1252 - 0.1291 in

Black

15.000 - 15.321 mm

3.502 - 3.602 mm

0.1379 - 0.1418 in

Pink

15.322 - 15.643 mm

3.824 - 3.924 mm

0.1506 - 0.1545 in

Brown

15.644 - 15.965 mm

RANGE REFERENCE



Mode Chart


VFS Line Pressure Reg Solenoid (PR)


ON/OFF

High Range Clutch (C2)


ON/OFF

Low Range Clutch (C1)


ON/OFF

Lube Boost (Motor Cooling)

ON/OFF

Damper Bypass Clutch

(DBC)

Unpowered State (pressure)

Normally High

Normally Low

Normally Low

Normally Low

Normally Low

PCS Number

PCS1

PCS2

PCS3

PCS4

PCS5


Range State

Park

Engine On


Regulating

OFF

ON


On Demand**

OFF

Engine Off

OFF

ON

ON

Reverse EV Mode

Engine Off

OFF

ON

ON

Neutral

Engine Off

OFF

OFF

ON

Drive

-

-

-

-

Single or Dual Motor EV


Engine Off


OFF


ON


ON

Extended Range Low

Engine On

OFF

ON

OFF

Extended Range Fixed Ratio


Engine On


ON


ON


OFF

Extended Range High

Engine On

ON

OFF

OFF

**Demand based on torque and temperature

TRANSMISSION INTERNAL MODE SWITCH LOGIC

image

Internal Mode Switch

Internal Mode Switch

Internal Mode Switch

Selector Position

Selector Position

Selector Position

Internal Mode Switch

Circuits/Parameter

Park

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

Low

Switch Operating Conditions: Ignition ON, range selector in appropriate gear

Internal Mode Switch A

High

Low

Low

High

High

Internal Mode Switch B

Low

High

High

Low

Low

Internal Mode Switch C

High

High

Low

Low

Low

Internal Mode Switch P

Low

Low

High

High

High

Internal Mode Switch S

Low

High

Low

High

Low

Always High status: Open/short to voltage condition Always Low status: Short to ground condition

SCHEMATIC WIRING DIAGRAMS

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROLS WIRING SCHEMATICS

Drive Mode Select Function


image

Fig. 1: Drive Mode Select Function

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Pressure Controls, Shift Controls and Speed Sensor

image

Fig. 2: Pressure Controls, Shift Controls and Speed Sensor Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Shift Lever Position Indicator

image

Fig. 3: Shift Lever Position Indicator

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

COMPONENT LOCATOR

DISASSEMBLED VIEWS

Case and Associated Parts (1 of 2)

image


Fig. 4: Case and Associated Parts (1 of 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Valve Body Cover Bolt

2

Control Valve Body Cover

3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal - Gasket

4

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal - O-Ring

5

Valve Body Bolt

6

Control Solenoid Valve

8

Valve Body Bolt

9

Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt

10

Fluid Transfer Pipe

11

Control Valve

12

Control Valve Lower Body Spacer Plate

13

Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Retainer

14

Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal

15

Automatic Transmission Case

16

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal

Callout

Component Name

17

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve

18

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal - O Ring

19

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch

20

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal - O Ring

21

Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module

22

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Bolt

23

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Gasket

24

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover

25

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Bolt

26

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Vent

27

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector

28

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolt

29

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Electrical Connector Seal

30

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Buss Bar Bolt

31

Input Drive Flange

32

Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Fitting Seal

33

Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate


Case and Associated Parts (2 of 2)


image

Fig. 5: Case and Associated Parts (2 of 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

50

Transmission Fluid Filler Cap

51

Variable High Clutch Housing Seal - O Ring

52

Input Sun Gear Shaft

53

Input Sun Gear

54

Input Sun Gear Retaining Ring

55

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

56

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Gasket

57

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug

58

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing

59

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug

60

Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt

61

Transmission Fluid Filler Tube Plug

62

Front Differential Carrier Bearing

63

Front Differential Carrier

64

Differential Carrier Sun Gear Thrust Bearing

65

Front Differential Carrier Sun Gear

66

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Hole Plug

67

Transmission Fluid Drain Plug

68

Automatic Transmission Case Plug

Transmission Case Assembly (1 of 2)

image

Fig. 6: Transmission Case Assembly (1 of 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

200

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter

201

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Seal

202

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Bolt

203

Automatic Transmission Auxiliary Fluid Pump Motor 3-Phase Cable Seal

204

Front Differential Carrier Baffle Bolt

205

Front Differential Carrier Baffle

206

Automatic Transmission Fluid Chip Collector Magnet

207

Automatic Transmission Pump Fluid Outlet Seal

208

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Motor

209

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Bolt

210

Drive Link Snubber Bolt

211

Drive Link Snubber - (Drive Side)

212

Drive Link Snubber Bolt

213

Drive Link Snubber - (Coast Side)

214

Drive Sprocket Retaining Ring

215

Drive Sprocket

Callout

Component Name

216

Park Gear Spring

217

Park Gear

218

Input Carrier

219

Driven Sprocket

220

Drive Link

221

Driven Sprocket Bearing


Transmission Case Assembly (2 of 2)


image


Fig. 7: Transmission Case Assembly (2 of 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

230

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

231

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Bolt

232

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector

233

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Pin

234

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Pin

235

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

236

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Locating Pin

Callout

Component Name

237

Drive Motor - (2nd Position)

238

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

239

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor

240

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Bolt

241

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube

242

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Bolt

243

Output Carrier

244

Output Carrier Thrust Bearing

245

Output Carrier Internal Gear

246

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub Thrust Bearing

247

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

248

Drive Motor - (1st Position)

249

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal

250

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal

251

Transmission Case Locating Pin

252

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt

253

Variable High Clutch Fluid Seal Ring


Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Assembly


image

Fig. 8: Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

300

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

301

Input Internal Gear

302

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

303

Input Brake Clutch

304

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer

305

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt

306

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener

307

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Bearing

308

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Return Spring Retaining Ring

309

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Return Spring

310

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Apply Bearing

311

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston

312

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Outer Seal

313

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Inner Seal

314

Input Shaft Bearing

315

Input Shaft Seal

316

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

317

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing

318

Front Differential Carrier Internal Gear Wear Ring

319

Front Differential Ring Gear

320

Front Differential Ring Gear Retainer

Control Valve Body Assembly

image

Fig. 9: Control Valve Body Assembly

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

400

Pressure Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

401

Pressure Regulator Valve Bore Plug

402

Pressure Regulator Valve

403

Pressure Regulator Valve Spring

404

Lube Regulator Valve Spring

405

Lube Regulator Valve

406

Lube Regulator Valve Bore Plug

407

Lube Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

408

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston Spring Retainer

409

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston Spring

410

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

411

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve Bore Plug Retainer

412

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Spring

413

Variable Low Clutch Valve

414

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Accumulator Piston

415

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Accumulator Piston Spring

Callout

Component Name

416

Control Valve Body

417

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

418

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Spring

419

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

420

Variable High Clutch Valve

421

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Spring

422

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

423

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve

424

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve Spring

425

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

426

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Retainer

427

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

428

Pressure Relief Ball Valve Spring Pin

429

Pressure Relief Ball Valve Spring

430

Pressure Relief Ball Valve


Drive Motor Assembly (1st Position)


image


Fig. 10: Drive Motor Assembly (1st Position) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Callout

Component Name

500

Drive Motor Support

501

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator

502

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

503

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip

504

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt

505

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer

506

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing

507

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide

508

Drive Motor Stator - (1st Position)

509

Drive Motor Stator Bolt

510

Drive Motor Rotor - (1st Position)

511

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


Drive Motor Assembly (2nd Position)


image


Fig. 11: Drive Motor Assembly (2nd Position) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

520

Drive Motor Support

Callout

Component Name

521

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator

522

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

523

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip

524

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt

525

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer

526

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing

527

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide

528

Drive Motor Stator - (2nd Position)

529

Drive Motor Stator Bolt

530

Drive Motor Rotor - (2nd Position)

531

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring

532

Output Sun Gear

533

Output Sun Gear Retaining Ring


Output Carrier Internal Gear Assembly


image


Fig. 12: Output Carrier Internal Gear Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

600

Output Carrier Internal Gear

601

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub

602

Output Carrier Internal Gear Retaining Ring

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

image

Fig. 13: Variable Low Clutch Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

610

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring - (Selective)

611

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate

612

Variable Low Clutch Plate - Friction

613

Variable Low Clutch Plate

614

Variable Low Clutch Spring

615

Variable Low Clutch Piston

616

Drive Motor - (1st Position)

Variable High Clutch Assembly

image

Fig. 14: Variable High Clutch Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

620

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

621

Variable High Clutch Hub

622

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

623

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring - (Selective)

624

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate

625

Variable High Clutch Plate - Friction

626

Variable High Clutch Plate

627

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

628

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Retaining Ring

629

Variable High Clutch Piston Outer Seal

630

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam

631

Variable High Clutch Piston Spring

632

Variable High Clutch Piston

633

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Outer Seal

634

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Inner Seal

635

Variable High Clutch Piston Inner Seal

Callout

Component Name

636

Variable High Clutch Housing

637

Variable High Clutch Housing Bolt


Torque Limiting Clutch Assembly


image


Fig. 15: Torque Limiting Clutch Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

640

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Backing Plate Ring

641

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Backing Plate

642

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Spring

643

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Backing Plate

644

Input Internal Gear

645

Input Internal Gear Hub

646

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

Park System Components

image

Fig. 16: Park System Components

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

700

Park Pawl Actuator Guide Bolt

701

Park Pawl Actuator Guide

702

Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft

703

Manual Shift Shaft Seal

704

Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin

705

Manual Shift Shaft Pin

706

Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring

707

Manual Shift Detent Lever

708

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket

709

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Connector Bracket Bolt

710

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket

711

Park Pawl Actuator

712

Park Pawl Shaft

713

Park Pawl Spring

714

Park Pawl

COMPONENT LOCATION

Component Locations


image


Fig. 17: Transaxle Internal Component Locations Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

6

Control Solenoid Valve

11

Control Valve

31

Input Drive Flange

52

Input Sun Gear Shaft

63

Front Differential Carrier Assembly

65

Front Differential Carrier Sun Gear

215

Drive Sprocket

217

Park Gear

218

Input Carrier

220

Drive Link

237

Drive Motor

239

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor

243

Output Carrier Assembly

Callout

Component Name

245

Output Carrier Internal Gear

248

Drive Motor

301

Input Internal Gear

303

Input Brake Clutch

306

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener

319

Front Differential Ring Gear

500

Drive Motor Support

508

Drive Motor Stator

520

Drive Motor Support

636

Variable High Clutch Housing

BUSHING, BEARING, AND WASHER LOCATIONS

Location Of The Bushings, Bearings, and Washers


image


Fig. 18: Bushings, Bearings, And Washer Locations Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

55

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

Callout

Component Name

62

Front Differential Carrier Bearing

64

Differential Carrier Sun Gear Thrust Bearing

221

Driven Sprocket Bearing

244

Output Carrier Thrust Bearing

246

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub Thrust Bearing

304

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer

307

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Bearing

310

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Apply Bearing

314

Input Shaft Bearing

620

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

622

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

SEAL LOCATIONS

Seal Locations #1


image


Fig. 19: Seal Locations #1

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Callout

Component Name

3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal - (Gasket)

14

Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal

51

Variable High Clutch Housing Seal - (O-ring)

56

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Gasket

235

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

249

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal

250

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal

253

Variable High Clutch Fluid Seal Ring

312

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Outer Seal

313

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Inner Seal

315

Input Shaft Seal

316

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

615

Variable Low Clutch Piston

629

Variable High Clutch Piston Outer Seal

633

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Outer Seal

635

Variable High Clutch Piston Inner Seal


Seal Locations #2


image


Fig. 20: Seal Locations #2

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

4

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal - (O-ring)

16

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal

18

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal - (O-ring)

Callout

Component Name

20

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal - (O-ring)

29

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Electrical Connector Seal

32

Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Fitting Seal

201

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Seal

203

Automatic Transmission Auxiliary Fluid Pump Motor 3-Phase Cable Seal

207

Automatic Transmission Pump Fluid Outlet Seal

703

Manual Shift Shaft Seal

DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES

DTC P0658 OR P0659: ACTUATOR HIGH CONTROL CIRCUIT GROUP 1 VOLTAGE

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle

image Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis

image An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions


DTC Descriptor


DTC P0658

Actuator High Control Circuit Group 1 Low Voltage

DTC P0659

Actuator High Control Circuit Group 1 High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit


Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance


Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

Ignition

P0658

P0659

P0659

-

Typical Scan Tool Data


High Side Drive 1

Circuit

Short to Ground

Open

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Ignition On

Parameter Normal Range: On

High Side Driver 1

Off

On

Off

Circuit/System Description


The high side driver 1 is internal to the Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1. With the ignition On, the high side driver 1 provides 12 V to the transmission control solenoid valve and line pressure control solenoid. If excessive current flow is detected in high side driver 1 circuit, the high side driver 1 will turn Off. When the circuit fault is corrected, the high side driver 1 will reset. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and both drive motor control modules are internal to the power inverter module, often referred to as the drive motor generator power inverter

module, and not serviced separately. Conditions for Running the DTC High side driver 1 is On.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


P0658

Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 has detected a short to ground on the high side driver 1 circuit during Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 initialization.

P0659

Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 has detected a short to voltage on the high side driver 1 circuit during Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 initialization.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets


DTCs P0658, and P0659 are Type A DTCs.

P0658

image The Hybrid/EV powertrain control module commands maximum line pressure.

image The Hybrid/EV powertrain control module inhibits clutch 1, also call the variable low clutch.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC


DTCs P0658, and P0659 are Type A DTCs.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

image COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

image INLINE HARNESS CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

image Electronic Component Description

image Transmission Component and System Description image Transmission General Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections

image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool High Side Driver 1 Command parameter displays On.

image If On is not displayed

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If On is displayed

3. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding the high side driver 1, On and Off with a scan tool.

image High Side Driver 1 Circuit Low Voltage Test Status image High Side Driver 1 Circuit Open Test Status

image High Side Driver 1 Circuit High Voltage Test Status

image If Multifunction is displayed

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If Multifunction is not displayed

4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observe from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.

5. Verify the DTC does not set.

image If the DTC sets

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If the DTC does not set

6. All OK.


Circuit/System Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal

protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Remove the Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement.

3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.

4. Connect the 12 V battery.

5. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the high side driver circuit X1 terminal 1 and the ground.

6. Verify the test lamp turns ON.

image If the test lamp is always OFF

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.

image If less than infinite resistance, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve.

image If infinite resistance

3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve. image If less than 2 Ω, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp is always ON

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module, ignition ON.

2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.

image If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit. image If less than 1 V, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

7. Test or replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement, often referred to as the

Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming, and setup.

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal for Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module is replaced. image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P0711-P0713: TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle

image Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis

image An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions


DTC Descriptor


DTC P0711

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Performance

DTC P0712

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P0713

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

TFT Sensor Signal

P0712

P0713

P0713

P0711

Low Reference

-

P0713

-

P0711

Typical Scan Tool Data


Transmission Fluid Temperature


Circuit


Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance


Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Engine running in Park, normal operating temperature

Parameter Normal Range: -39 to +149°C (-38 to +300°F)

TFT Signal

Greater than 149°C (300°F)

Less than -39°C (-38°F)

Less than -39°C (-38°F)*

Low Reference

-

Less than -39°C (-38°F)

Less than -39°C (-38°F)*

* Internal TFT sensor damage may result if shorted to B+

Circuit/System Description

The primary source of heat in the transmission is the drive motor generators. The drive motor generators are cooled by the transmission fluid. Hot fluid exits the drive motor generators and flows to the transmission cooler supply line. The supply line connects to the transmission cooler, which is internal to the radiator. The transmission fluid cooler pipe assembly is equipped with an internal thermostat that opens at 80°C (176°F) for optimum transmission operation and fuel economy. The transmission cooler pipe thermostat is part of the transmission fluid cooler pipe assembly, located near the transmission and is not serviced separately. From the cooler, the fluid returns through the transmission fluid cooler pipe assembly and enters the lubrication circuits. After lubricating the internal components, the fluid returns to the oil pan. The transmission fluid temperature sensor is part of the control solenoid valve assembly and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image The ignition On is greater than 3 s.

image The system voltage is greater than 9 V.

P0711

image DTCs P0712, P0713, U179A, or U0293 are not active. image Vehicle speed is detected for 5 s.

image Cold soak average and vehicle running transmission fluid temperature is between -40°C (-40°F) and 130°C (266°F).

image The difference between the transmission fluid temperature sensor and the cold soak average temperature is less than 15°C (27°F) at -40°C to -20°C (-40°F to -4°F) or less than 10°C (18°F) greater than

-20°C (-40°F) ambient temperature.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


P0711

image The difference between the transmission fluid temperature sensor and the cold soak average temperature is greater than 15°C (27°F) at -40°C to -20°C (-40°F to -4°F) or greater than 10°C (18°F) greater than -20°C (-40°F) ambient temperature for greater than or equal to 300 s.

OR

image The transmission fluid temperature is stuck for greater than or equal to 300 s.

P0712

The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 detects a transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance of less than or equal to 68.6 Ω which corresponds to 149°C (300°F) for 2 s out of a 3 s window.

P0713

The Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 detects a transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance of greater than or equal to 83,641 Ω which corresponds to -50°C (-58°F) for 2 s out of a 3 s window.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets


image DTCs P0711, P0712 and P0713 are Type A DTCs.

image The Hybrid/EV powertrain control module switches to a calculated transmission fluid temperature.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


DTCs P0711, P0712 and P0713 are Type A DTCs.

Diagnostic Aids


The Transmission Fluid Temperature parameter on the scan tool should rise steadily to a normal operating temperature, and then stabilize. Ask about the customer's driving habits, overloading, etc. Ensure the engine and transmission cooling system is functioning normally.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Special Tools

GE-24731 Tempil Stick

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON, observe the scan tool Transmission Fluid Temperature and the ECT temperature parameter after a 9 hour cold soak. The readings should be between -50 to 149°C (-58°F to 300°F) and vary less than 15°C (27°F) at -40°C to -20°C (-40°F to -4°F) or less than 10°C (18°F) greater than -20°C

(-40°F) from ambient temperature after an 9.5 hour cold soak. The transmission fluid temperature parameter should rise steadily then stabilize when the vehicle is driven for greater than 300 s.

image If greater than the specified range, or stuck at a fixed temperature

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If within the specified range

Test for a transmission overheat condition. Refer to Transmission Overheats .

image If no automatic transmission overheating condition exists

2. Refer to Circuit System Testing.


Circuit/System Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Remove the Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Removal.

3. Vehicle Off and all vehicle systems Off. Disconnect the X1 harness connector at the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve. It may take up to 2 min. for all vehicle systems to power down.

4. Test for less than 10 Ω between the low reference circuit terminal 4 on the X1 harness connector and ground.

image If 10 Ω or greater

1. Vehicle Off, disconnect the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness (Control Solenoid Valve) harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the low reference circuit end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness (Control Solenoid Valve). image If less than 2 Ω, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If less than 10 Ω

5. Vehicle in Service Mode.

6. Test for 4.8 - 5.2 V between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

image If not between 4.8 - 5.2 V

1. Ignition Off, disconnect the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness (Control Solenoid Valve) harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal 3 and ground.

image If less than infinite resistance, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness (Control Solenoid Valve).

image If infinite resistance

3. Test for less than 1 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.

image If 1 Ω or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness (Control Solenoid Valve). image If less than 1 Ω, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If between 4.8 - 5.2 V

7. Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.


Component Testing

1. Perform each step listed below:

image Perform the Fluid Leak Diagnosis .

image Perform the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check procedure. image Perform the Line Pressure Check procedure.

image Perform the Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Pressure High or Low procedure.

image With a hand held infra-red thermometer, or GE-24731 tempil stick test for the transmission cooler supply line thermostat for opening at 80°C (176°F). The transmission cooler supply line temperature should be higher on the transmission side of the thermostat than the cooler side until 80°C (176°F) is reached.

image If the thermostat tests stuck open or closed

Replace the transmission cooler supply pipe assembly.

image If thermostat tests OK

2. Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test. image If a concern is found

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.

image If a concern is not found

3. All OK.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Thermal Bypass Valve Replacement

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming and setup.

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement. image Refer to Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Replacement

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P0721: OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR PERFORMANCE

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P0721

Output Speed Sensor Performance

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

OSS Supply Voltage

P077C, P215C

P077D, P215C

P215C

P0721, P077B, P215C

Low Reference

P215C

P215C

P215C

P0721, P077B, P215C

Typical Scan Tool Data


Output Shaft Direction


Circuit


Normal Range

Open/High Resistance


Short to Voltage


Short to Ground

Operating Conditions: Vehicle moving, normal operating temperature

Transmission OSS

Forward/Reverse

Invalid/Unknown

Invalid/Unknown

Invalid/Unknown

Output Shaft Speed Sensor

Greater than 0 RPM

0 RPM

0 RPM

0 RPM

Circuit/System Description


The A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly has 2 internal hall-effect type sensors, and is capable of sensing both speed and direction. The output speed sensor is internal to the transmission and mounts to the A/Trans case assembly and is connected to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 through the transmission internal harness. The A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly faces the park gear machined teeth surface. The sensor receives 5 V on the OSS supply voltage circuit from the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. As the output shaft rotates, the sensor produces a signal frequency based on the machined surface of the output shaft. The two sensor elements in the output speed sensor assembly are spaced approximately 1/2 a tooth apart.

image When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, sensor A detects a particular tooth before sensor B. image When the vehicle is moving in a reverse direction, sensor B detects a particular tooth before sensor A.

The electronics in the sensor combine the two signals and send a signal with a different pulse width. This signal is interpreted by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 for speed and direction and is transmitted through the serial data circuits to the engine control module (ECM) The ECM, hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, compare the output speed sensor signal with the antilock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor signal. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced

separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


The vehicle is ON.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects an invalid Automatic Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor direction for 2.5 s within a 3 s window.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 calculates vehicle speed based on the drive motor 2 speed.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P0721 is a Type A DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information. Special Tools

EL 38522 Variable Signal Generator

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Operate the vehicle at 16 - 32 km/h (10 - 20 mph), observe the scan tool Transmission OSS parameter. The reading should be greater than 150 RPM and not drop out.

2. Observe the scan tool OSS Supply Voltage parameter. The reading should display OK.


Circuit/System Testing

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.

3. Verify DTC P7021 is not set.

image If DTC is set

Perform the Output Shaft Speed Input Test.

image If the DTC is not set

4. All OK


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P077B-P077D: OUTPUT SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P077B

Output Speed Sensor Circuit Direction Incorrect

DTC P077C

Output Speed Sensor Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P077D

Output Speed Sensor Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

OSS Supply Voltage

P077C, P215B

P0721, P215B, P077D

P0721, P215B, P077D

P077B, P0721, P215C


Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

OSS Signal

P077C, P215B

P0721, P215B, P077D

P0721, P215B, P077D

P077B, P0721, P215C


Typical Scan Tool Data


Output Shaft Direction

Circuit

Normal Range

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Engine running, normal operating temperature

Transmission OSS

Forward/Reverse

Out of Range

Out of Range

OSS Supply Voltage

OK

Out of Range

Out of Range

Circuit/System Description


The transmission output shaft speed sensor has 2 internal hall-effect type sensors, and is capable of sensing both speed and direction. The transmission output shaft speed sensor mounts to the A/Trans case assembly and is connected to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 assembly through a wire harness and connector. The sensor faces the drive sprocket machined teeth surface. The sensor receives 5 V on the OSS supply voltage circuit from the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. As the drive sprocket rotates, the sensor produces a signal frequency based on the machined surface of the drive sprocket.

The two sensor elements in the transmission output shaft speed sensor are spaced approximately 1/2 a tooth apart.

image When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, sensor A detects a particular tooth before sensor B. image When the vehicle is moving in a reverse direction, sensor B detects a particular tooth before sensor A.

The electronics in the sensor combine the two signals and send a signal with a different pulse width. This signal is interpreted by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 for speed and direction and is transmitted through the GMLAN circuits to the ECM. The ECM and hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, compare the OSS signal with hybrid motor speed/direction and the ABS wheel speed sensor signal.

Conditions for Running the DTC


P077B

image DTC P0721, P077C, P077D, or P215C is not set.

image The drive motor estimated output speed is greater than 50 RPM.

P077C

image DTC P077D is not set.

image System voltage is at least 9 V and no more than 32 V.

P077D

image DTC P077B is not set.

image System voltage is at least 9 V and no more than 32 V.


Conditions for Setting the DTC

P077B

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects an incorrect OSS direction.

P077C

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects the output speed sensor signal voltage is less than 0.36 V for

0.25 s.

P077D

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects the output speed sensor signal voltage is greater than 4.25 V for

0.25 s.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 uses drive motor 2 speed to calculate vehicle speed.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


P077B, P077C, and P077D are Type A DTCs.

Diagnostic Aids


Inspect the output speed sensor, harness, connector and control solenoid valve assembly pins for metallic debris and output shaft machined face for damage or misalignment. Proper torque of the output speed sensor mounting bolt is critical to proper output speed sensor operation. Use a terminal test kit for any test that requires probing the control solenoid valve assembly harness connector or a component harness connector.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Electronic Component Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information. Special Tools

EL 38522 Variable Signal Generator

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Verify that DTC P0721, P0970, P0971, P0973, P2720, P2721, P2729, or P2730 are not set.

image If any of the DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

2. Operate the vehicle at 16 - 32 km/h (10 - 20 mph) while observing the Transmission Data OSS Direction parameter on the scan tool. The OSS Direction parameter should match vehicle direction.

image If the OSS parameter corresponds with the vehicle direction and the DTC is set, replace the T6 power inverter module.

Circuit/System Testing

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.

3. Verify DTC P077B, P077C, or P077D is not set.

image If DTC is set

Perform the Output Shaft Speed Input Test.

image If the DTC is not set

4. All OK


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, also called the T6 power inverter module replacement, programming, and setup

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P079A: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 1 SLIP DETECTED

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor

DTC P079A

Transmission Clutch 1 Slip Detected

Typical Scan Tool Data


Variable Low Clutch Reference


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Slipping when Commanded ON

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 161 km/h (0 - 100 mph)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 1 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 1 Status

Applied

Released

Applied

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors the Clutch 1 Slip Speed for each Hybrid Transmission Mode Commanded state. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors clutch slip when the variable low clutch is applied. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Clutch 1 is applied.

image No P1B0D, P1B0E, P1E4A or P1E4B DTCs.

image The commanded line pressure is at least 190 kPa (28 psi) for 1 s.

image The variable low clutch torque estimated is greater than 74 N.m (55 lb ft) for 1 s. image Wheel slip speed is 0.

image Shutdown is not commanded.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects clutch 1 slip speed greater than 190 RPM for 1 s, 3 times within the same key cycle.

image Clutch 1 energy is greater than 8 joules 3 times within the same key cycle, the fault will set instantly.


Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P079A is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands the internal combustion engine On. image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 1 and gear 1.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC P079A is a Type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

image Electronic Component Description

image Transmission Component and System Description image Transmission General Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Verify that DTC P0721, P077B-P077D or P215C is not set.

image If the DTC is set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

image If the DTC is not set

3. Verify correct fluid level and condition by performing the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check.

4. Verify correct oil pressure by performing the Line Pressure Check.

5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. The Clutch 1 Slip Speed parameter reading should be less than 190 RPM when the Clutch 1 Status parameter reading is Applied.

image If clutch slip speed is greater than 190 RPM

Refer to Component Testing.

image If clutch slip speed is less than 190 RPM

6. All OK.

Component Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling

2. Verify control solenoid valve assembly condition by performing the Control Solenoid Valve Inspection.

3. Verify control solenoid valve assembly function by performing the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test.

image If a concern is found

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.

image If no concern is found

4. Inspect the a/trans fluid level control valve for stuck closed or damaged condition.

image If you found a concern with the a/trans fluid level control valve

Replace the a/trans fluid level control valve.

image If no concern is found

5. Inspect the valve body components and hydraulic circuits listed below for a leak or a stuck valve. Refer to

Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection:

image Control valve body spacer (w/gasket) plate assembly

image Variable low clutch valve and variable low clutch accumulator.

image If you found a concern in the valve body

Repair or replace the valve or valve body.

image If no concern is found

6. Inspect the variable low clutch assembly snap ring, piston, clutch discs, and housing for a slipping or damaged condition.

image If you found a variable low clutch assembly concern

Repair or replace the variable low clutch assembly as necessary.

image If no concern is found

7. Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement for control valve body replacement.

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Variable Low Clutch Plate Removal, and Variable Low Clutch Plate Installation for variable low clutch replacement.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module replacement, programming, and setup.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P079B: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 2 SLIP DETECTED

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P079B

Transmission Clutch 2 Slip Detected

Typical Scan Tool Data


Variable High Clutch Reference


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Slipping when Commanded ON

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 80 km/h (0 - 50 mph)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 2 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 2 Status

Applied

Released

Applied

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors Clutch 2 Slip Speed for each Hybrid Transmission Mode Commanded state. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors clutch slip when the variable high clutch is commanded ON. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Clutch 2 is applied.

image No P1B0D, P1B0E, P1E4A or P1E4B DTCs.

image The commanded line pressure is at least 190 kPa (28 psi) for 1 s.

image The variable high clutch torque estimated is greater than 15 N.m (11 lb ft) for 1 s. image Wheel slip speed is 0.

image Shutdown is not commanded.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects clutch 2 slip speed greater than 100 RPM for 2.5 s within a 3 s window, 3 times within the same key cycle.

image Clutch 1 energy is greater than 5.8 joules 3 times within the same key cycle, the fault will set instantly.


Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image DTC P079B is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 2 and gear 1.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC P079B is a Type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

image Electronic Component Description

image Transmission Component and System Description image Transmission General Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Verify that DTC P0721, P077B-P077D or P215C is not set.

image If the DTC is set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

image If the DTC is not set

3. Verify correct fluid level and condition by performing the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check.

4. Verify correct oil pressure by performing the Line Pressure Check.

5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. The Clutch 2 Slip Speed parameter reading should be less than 100 RPM when the Clutch 2 Status parameter reading is Applied.

image If clutch slip speed is greater than 100 RPM

Refer to Component Testing.

image If clutch slip speed is less than 100 RPM

6. All OK.


Component Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following

Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Verify control solenoid valve assembly condition by performing the Control Solenoid Valve Inspection.

3. Verify control solenoid valve assembly function by performing the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test.

image If a concern is found

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.

image If no concern is found

4. Inspect the a/trans fluid level control valve is for a stuck, closed or damaged condition.

image If you found a concern with the a/trans fluid level control valve

Replace the a/trans fluid level control valve.

image If no concern is found

5. Inspect the variable high clutch valve is not sticking or damaged. Refer to Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection.

image If you found a concern with the variable high clutch valve

Repair or replace the valve body.

image If no concern is found

6. Verify the variable high clutch assembly piston, snap ring, and clutch discs are not in a damaged condition.

image If you found a variable high clutch concern

Repair or replace the variable high clutch as necessary.

image If no concern is found

7. Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement for control valve body replacement

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Variable High Clutch Removal, and Variable High Clutch Installation for variable high clutch replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection

image Refer to Transmission Replacement for Transmission removal.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module replacement, programming, and setup.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P079C: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 3 SLIP DETECTED

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P079C

Transmission Clutch 3 Slip Detected

Typical Scan Tool Data


Input Brake Clutch Reference


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Slipping when Commanded ON

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 161 km/h (0 - 100 mph)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 3 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,300 RPM

0 - 6,300 RPM

Clutch 3 Status

Applied

Released

Applied

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors the Clutch Slip 3 Speed for each Hybrid Transmission Mode Commanded state. Clutch 3 in the vehicle software is tied to the input brake clutch in the transmission. This is a one way mechanical clutch. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Line pressure command is greater than 190 kPa (27.6 psi) for 1 s. image No P1B0D, P1B0E, P1E4A, or P1E4B motor speed DTCs are set. image Clutch 3 command is Locked.

image Wheel slip speed is 0.

image Shutdown is not commanded.


Conditions for Setting the DTC

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects the clutch 3 Slip Speed is greater than 100 RPM for 1 s.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P079C is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands the internal combustion engine On.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC P079C is a Type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Component Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and

personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Inspect the flexplate for a broken condition.

3. Inspect the input brake clutch for a broken condition.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Transmission Replacement for Transmission removal image Refer to Automatic Transmission Flex Plate Removal

image Refer to Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Disassemble for Input Brake Clutch removal procedure

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P07A3: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 1 STUCK ON

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P07A3

Transmission Clutch 1 Stuck On

Typical Scan Tool Data


Variable Low Clutch Reference

Parameter

Commanded ON

Commanded OFF

Stuck/Welded When




Commanded OFF

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 50 MPH (80 km/h)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 1 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 9,500 RPM

0 RPM

Clutch 1 Status

Applied

Released

Released


Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors the variable low clutch slip speed for each Hybrid/EV Transmission Mode Command state. Low clutch slip speed when the clutch is commanded Off indicates a stuck or welded clutch condition. If the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects a stuck clutch condition, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 will cycle the clutch 3 times within 30 seconds. The customer may feel 3 bumps before the DTC sets. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Variable low clutch (Clutch 1) is commanded OFF.

image No P179A, P1B0D, P1B0E, P1E4A, or P1E4B motor speed DTCs are set. image Shutdown is not commanded.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


Clutch slip is less than 30 RPM 3 times within 1 s when clutch slip is expected.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P07A3 is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands clutch 1 and clutch 2 Off.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC P07A3 is a Type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any transmission output speed sensor DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Verify that P0721, P077B-P077D or P215C is not set.

image If any of the DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

2. Perform the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check to verify correct fluid level and condition. image If the transmission fluid is low or discolored, refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Fill.

3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC while monitoring the Clutch 1 Slip Speed parameter. The Clutch 1 Slip Speed parameter should display greater than 30 RPM when the Clutch 1 Status parameter displays Released.

image If the DTC P07A3 resets, go to Component Testing.


Component Testing

1. Verify correct oil pressure by performing the Line Pressure Check.

2. Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test.

image If a concern is found, replace the Q8 control solenoid valve.

3. Inspect the valve body assembly for sticking or damaged valves. Refer Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection.

image If you found a stuck or damaged valve, repair or replace the valve or valve body.

4. Inspect the variable low clutch for a stuck On or damaged condition.

image If you found a variable low clutch concern, repair or replace the variable low clutch assembly as necessary.

Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

image Refer to Variable Low Clutch Plate Removal, and Variable Low Clutch Plate Installation for variable clutch repair or replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal for Q8 control solenoid valve or control valve body replacement.

image Refer to Transmission Replacement for transmission removal.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P07A5: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 2 STUCK ON

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P07A5

Transmission Clutch 2 Stuck On

Typical Scan Tool Data


Variable High Clutch Reference

Parameter

Commanded ON

Commanded OFF

Stuck/Welded When Commanded OFF

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 50 MPH (80 km/h)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 2 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

0 RPM

Clutch 2 Status

Applied

Released

Released

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module monitors the Clutch Slip parameters for each Hybrid/EV Transmission Mode Command state. Low clutch slip speed when the clutch is commanded Off indicates a stuck or welded clutch condition. If the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects a stuck clutch condition, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 will cycle the clutch 3 times within 30 seconds. The customer may feel 3 bumps before the DTC sets. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Variable high clutch (Clutch 2) is commanded Off.

image No P179B, P1B0D, P1B0E, P1E4A, or P1E4B motor speed DTCs are set. image Shutdown is not commanded.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


Clutch slip is less than 30 RPM 3 times within 1 s when clutch slip is expected.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P07A5 is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 1.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands clutch 1 and clutch 2 Off.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands the internal combustion engine On.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC

P07A5 is a Type A DTC.

Diagnostic Aids


When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Verify that P0721, P077B-P077D or P215C is not set.

image If any of the DTCs are set, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

2. Perform the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check to verify correct fluid level and condition. image If the transmission fluid is low or discolored, refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Fill.

3. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC while observing the Clutch 2 Slip Speed parameter. The Clutch 2 Slip Speed parameter should display greater than 30 RPM when the Clutch 2 Status parameter displays Released.

image If the DTC P07A5 is set, go to Component Testing.


Component Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:

image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Verify correct oil pressure by performing the Line Pressure Check. image If you found a concern, repair the concern.

3. Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test.

image If a concern is found, replace the Q8 control solenoid valve assembly.

4. Inspect the valve body assembly for sticking or damaged valves. Refer Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection.

image If you found a concern, repair or replace the valve or valve body.

5. Inspect the variable high clutch for a stuck On or damaged condition.

image If you found a variable high clutch concern, repair or replace the variable high clutch assembly as necessary.

Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

image Refer to Variable High Clutch Removal, and Variable High Clutch Installation for variable high clutch replacement or overhaul.

image Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement for control valve body replacement.

image Perform the valve body inspection procedure, refer to Control Solenoid Valve Inspection. If the inspection procedure indicates to replace the valve body, refer to Control Valve Body Replacement.

image Refer to Transmission Replacement for transmission removal.

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P07A7: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 3 STUCK ON

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P07A7

Transmission Clutch 3 Stuck On

Typical Scan Tool Data


Input Brake Clutch Reference


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Stuck when Commanded OFF

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 161 km/h (0 - 100 mph)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 3 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,300 RPM

0 - 6,300 RPM

Clutch 3 Status

Applied

Released

Applied

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors the Clutch Slip 3 Speed for each Hybrid Transmission Mode Commanded state. Clutch 3 in the vehicle software is tied to the input brake clutch in the transmission. This is a one way mechanical clutch. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


Clutch 3 command is Off.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects the clutch 3 Slip Speed is greater than 0 RPM for 1 s when commanded Off.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P07A7 is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits gear 1.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands the internal combustion engine Off.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC P07A7 is a Type A DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in

duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Verify that the internal combustion engine (ICE) starts and stays running.

image If the ICE does not start

Refer to Engine Will Not Crank - Crankshaft Will Not Rotate

image If the ICE starts and stays running

2. All OK.


Component Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Inspect the input brake clutch for a broken or seized condition. The input break clutch should rotate freely in one direction and lock in the other direction.

3. If the input brake clutch tests OK, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Seized Engine or Transmission Separation

image Refer to Transmission Replacement for Transmission removal

image Refer to Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Disassemble for Input Brake Clutch removal procedure

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming, and setup. image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P0960, P0962, OR P0963: TRANSMISSION CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 CONTROL CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptors


DTC P0960

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 1 Control Circuit Open

DTC P0962

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 1 Control Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P0963

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 1 Control Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Low Side Driver

P0962

P0963

P0963

P0960

Circuit/System Description


The line pressure control solenoid regulates the transmission fluid line pressure. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 varies the current to the normally high line pressure control solenoid valve from 0.1 amp for maximum line pressure, to 1.1 amps for minimum line pressure. This is accomplished by varying the current in order to obtain the desired line pressure in kPa (psi). The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image The propulsion system is active.

image The system voltage is 11 - 18 volts.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


P0960

The transmission control module detects an internal electrical performance malfunction of the line pressure control solenoid control circuit for 5 s.

P0962

The transmission control module detects an internal low voltage electrical malfunction of the line pressure control solenoid control circuit for 400 milliseconds.

P0963

The transmission control module detects an internal high voltage electrical malfunction of the line pressure control solenoid control circuit for 400 milliseconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


DTCs P0960, P0962 and P0963 are Type A DTCs.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


DTCs P0960, P0962 and P0963 are Type A DTCs.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON, verify the transmission fluid temperature is between 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F).

2. Drive the vehicle, observe the scan tool Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Test Status parameters. The reading should display OK.

image If the reading is not within the specified value

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If the reading is within specification

3. All OK.


Circuit/System Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Remove the Control Valve Body Cover, refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement.

3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve.

4. Connect the 12 V battery.

5. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve circuit terminal A and the ground circuit terminal B.

6. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Increase and Decrease with a scan tool.

image If the test lamp is always OFF

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and switched ground circuit to ground.

image If less than infinite resistance, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch.

image If infinite resistance

3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit and switched ground circuits end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch.

image If less than 2 Ω, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp is always ON

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module, ignition ON.

2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.

image If 1 V or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch.

image If less than 1 V, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

7. Replace the Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement.

image Refer to Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal to replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module is replaced. image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P0964, P0966-P0968, P0970, P0971, P2718, P2720, P2721, P2727, P2729, OR P2730: TRANSMISSION CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2, 3, 4 OR 5 CONTROL CIRCUIT(S)

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle

image Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis

image An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions


DTC Descriptor


DTC P0964

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 2 Control Circuit Open

DTC P0966

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 2 Control Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P0967

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 2 Control Circuit High Voltage

DTC P0968

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 3 Control Circuit Open

DTC P0970

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 3 Control Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P0971

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 3 Control Circuit High Voltage

DTC P2718

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 4 Control Circuit Open

DTC P2720

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 4 Control Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P2721

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 4 Control Circuit High Voltage

DTC P2727

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 5 Control Circuit Open

DTC P2729

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 5 Control Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P2730

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 5 Control Circuit High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information


Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Clutch Pressure Control

P0966, P0970, P2720,

P0964, P0968, P2718, P2727

P0967, P0971, P2721,

Solenoid 2/3/4/5 Control

P2729

P2730

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 supplies 12 volts to the clutch pressure control solenoid valve. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 controls the pressure control solenoids through the clutch pressure control solenoid valve control circuits. The normally closed pressure control solenoid valve flows fluid to the appropriate transmission hydraulic circuit when commanded ON. The clutch pressure control solenoids are part of the control solenoid valve and are not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Propulsion system is active.

image The system voltage is 9 - 16 V.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


P0964, P0968, P2718, P2727

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects an open solenoid control circuit for 1 s.

P0966, P0970, P2720, P2729

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects a low voltage solenoid control circuit for 1 s.

P0967, P0971, P2721, P2730

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects a high voltage solenoid control circuit for 1 s.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets


DTCs P0964, P0966, P0967, P0968, P0970, P0971, P2718, P2720, P2721, P2727, P2729, and P2730 are Type A DTCs.

P0964, P0967

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 1. image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits gear 1.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits commands the internal combustion engine On.

P0966

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 2.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 commands clutch 1 and clutch 2 Off.

P2718

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 2 and gear 1.

P2720

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 1.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits commands the internal combustion engine On.

P2721

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits mode 2. image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits gear 1.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


DTCs P0964, P0966, P0967, P0968, P0970, P0971, P2718, P2720, P2721, P2727, P2729, and P2730 are Type A DTCs.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON, verify the transmission fluid temperature is between 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F).

2. Drive the vehicle in order to obtain single motor mode, observe the scan tool Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test Status parameters. The readings should display OK.

image If the reading is not within the specified range

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If the reading is within specified range

3. All OK.


Circuit/System Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Remove the Control Valve Body Cover, refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement.

3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly.

4. Connect the 12 V battery.

5. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the control circuit terminal and the ground circuit terminals listed below:

image Solenoid valve 2, high side driver circuit terminal 1 to control circuit terminal 2 image Solenoid valve 3, high side driver circuit terminal 7 to control circuit terminal 8 image Solenoid valve 4, high side driver circuit terminal 7 to control circuit terminal 6 image Solenoid valve 5, high side driver circuit terminal 7 to control circuit terminal 5

6. Verify the test lamp turns ON and OFF when commanding the Pressure Control Solenoid Valve On and Off with a scan tool for each corresponding solenoid.

image If the test lamp is always OFF

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.

image If less than infinite resistance, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve.

image If infinite resistance

3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve. image If less than 2 Ω, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp is always ON

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module, ignition ON.

2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.

image If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit. image If less than 1 V, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

7. Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement.

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal for Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P152A OR P152D: REGENERATIVE BRAKING CONTROL SWITCH 1 CIRCUIT/REGENERATIVE BRAKING CONTROL SWITCH 1 AND 2 CIRCUIT

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptors


DTC P152A

Regenerative Braking Control Switch 1 Circuit

DTC P152D

Regenerative Braking Control Switch 1 and 2 Circuit

Diagnostic Fault Information


Regenerative Braking On Demand


Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance


Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

Normal Range = Inactive/Active


Tap Up/Tap Down Switch Signal 2 Circuit


P152D

Regenerative Braking On Demand

Malfunction

Regenerative Braking On Demand

Malfunction


P152A, P152C

Circuit/System Description


Regenerative Braking On Demand enables drivers to actively re-capture energy when slowing down, such as when approaching slower traffic or setting up for a tight turn. To engage Regenerative Braking On Demand, the driver releases the accelerator pedal and pulls back on the left steering-wheel paddle to begin regenerating electricity. When engaged, Regenerative Braking On Demand provides vehicle deceleration that is more than what a typical vehicle experiences while coasting or when the transmission shifter is in the L position, providing control and dynamic performance characteristics similar to downshifting in a manual-transmission vehicle. The feature does not bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Releasing the paddle cancels the Regeneration on Demand request, allowing the vehicle to coast normally. The driver can engage and disengage Regeneration on Demand as desired and as traffic conditions allow. When Regenerative Braking On Demand is requested, a signal is sent to the Body Control Module and then to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 via serial data. The Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter is displayed as Inactive and Active on the scan tool. The Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter states are listed below:

image Inactive - when the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left is not switch is pressed image Active - when the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left is pressed

Conditions for Running the DTC


Propulsion system is active. Conditions for Setting the DTC P152A

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects the Regenerative Braking On Demand is active for greater than

600 s.

P152D

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects an invalid voltage regenerative braking on demand switch - left circuit for 60 s.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image DTC P152A and P152D are Type C DTCs.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 disables regenerative braking on demand.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC


DTC P152A and P152D are Type C DTCs.

Diagnostic Aids


DTC P152A can be customer induced by holding regenerative braking control switch in the regeneration on demand position while driving for greater than 600 s. Verify the customer is not pressing the switch for greater than 600 s.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

image COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

image INLINE HARNESS CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON, verify with a scan tool the following hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 parameter displays the correct values the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left state:

image Regenerative Braking On Demand displays Inactive when not pressed. image Regenerative Braking On Demand displays Active when pressed.

image If the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 parameter is incorrect

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter is correct

2. After performing the above step, verify that the DTC does not reset by operating the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. If the vehicle passes the Circuit/System Verification procedure then STOP. Do not perform the Circuit/System Testing or Component Testing as this may result in an unnecessary part replacement. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .

Circuit/System Testing

1. Vehicle OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the S2L automatic transmission

manual shift switch-left. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the ground circuit terminal X1 3 and ground.

image If 10 Ω or greater

1. Vehicle OFF.

2. Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit.

image If less than 2 Ω, repair the open/high resistance in the ground connection.

image If less than 10 Ω

3. Vehicle ON.

4. Verify the scan tool Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter is Inactive.

image If not Inactive

1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the harness connector at the K9 BCM X3 connector.

2. Test for infinite resistance between the signal circuit terminal X3 21 and ground. image If less than infinite resistance, repair the short to ground on the circuit.

image If infinite resistance, replace the K9 BCM.

image If Active

5. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between the signal circuit terminal 2 and the ground circuit terminal 3.

6. Verify the scan tool Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter is Active.

image If not Inactive

1. Vehicle OFF, remove the jumper wire, disconnect the X3 harness connector at the K9 BCM, vehicle ON.

2. Test for less than 1 V between the signal circuit terminal 21 and ground. image If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit.

image If less than 1 V

3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the signal circuit end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, repair the open/high resistance in the circuit. image If less than 2 Ω, replace the K9 BCM.

image If Active

7. Test or replace the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

image Refer to Steering Wheel Replacement for S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left replacement. image Refer to Control Module References for K9 BCM replacement, programming, and setup.

DTC P152C: REGENERATIVE BRAKING CONTROL SWITCH SIGNAL MESSAGE COUNTER INCORRECT

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.

DTC Descriptor


DTC P152C

Regenerative Braking Control Switch Signal Message Counter Incorrect

Circuit/System Description


Hybrid Low Mode enables drivers to actively re-capture energy when slowing down, such as when approaching slower traffic or setting up for a tight turn. To engage hybrid low mode the shift lever is placed in low (L), the driver shift request, also known as the tap shift function is activated. The driver shift request allows the vehicle operator to switch from L2 to L1 pressing the minus (-) button and back to L2 by pressing the plus (+) button. The body control module (BCM) supplies a signal circuit to the automatic transmission manual shift switch. The automatic transmission manual shift switch has switches connected to a resistor array. When the lever is in the L position, a voltage drop occurs across the resistor network. When the plus or minus button is pressed, a corresponding voltage drop occurs across the resistor network. This voltage drop is monitored by the BCM. The BCM will send the request to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 to perform the transition from L2 to L1 or if already in L1 then back to L2. When the shifter is moved the L position, the instrument cluster will display L2, the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 will command a higher level of regenerative braking than what is commanded in the D position.

When the minus (-) button is pressed, the L1 mode is commanded by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. When the plus (+) button is pressed when in L1 mode the system will transition back to L2.

Conditions for Running the DTC The propulsion system is active. Conditions for Setting the DTC

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module has detected a drive mode signal rolling count error for 0.8 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P152C is a Type C DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P152C is a Type C DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set hybrid/EV powertrain control module serial data DTCs, run the vehicle in propulsion system active mode for at least 1 minute, and then shut the vehicle off for 30 seconds. Following this procedure will allow for a complete hybrid/EV powertrain control module shutdown.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Run the vehicle in propulsion system active mode for 1 minute, then vehicle OFF for 30 seconds.

2. Verify DTC P152C is not set.

image If the DTC is set

1. Program the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Verify the DTC does not set.

image If the DTC is set, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module. image If the DTC does not set

3. All OK.

image If the DTC is not set

3. All OK.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement, programming and setup.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming if the T6 Power Inverter Module is programed or replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P16F7: CONTROL MODULE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID COMMAND INCORRECT

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P16F7

Control Module Pressure Control Solenoid Command Incorrect

Circuit/System Description

This is an internal fault detection of the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 or drive motor control modules. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and both drive motor control modules are internal to the power inverter module, often referred to as the drive motor generator power inverter module, and not serviced separately. This fault is handled inside the power inverter module, and no external circuits are involved.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image The vehicle is ON.

image The system voltage is greater than 9.5 V.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


The control module has detected an internal malfunction.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image DTC P16F7 is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 requests the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 2 to open the high voltage contactor relays.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P16F7 is a Type A DTC. Reference Information

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Verify DTC P0562 is not set.

image If the DTC is set

Refer to DTC B1325, B1330, B1517, C0800, C0899, C0900, C12E1, C12E2, P0561-P0563, P1A0C, P1A0D, or P1EFC .

image If the DTC is not set

3. Verify DTC P16F7 is not set.

image If the DTC is set

1. Program the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Verify the DTC does not set.

image If the DTC sets, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module. image If the DTC does not set.

3. All OK

image If the DTC is not set

4. All OK


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming, and setup

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P179C: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 1 MINOR SLIP DETECTED

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P179C

Transmission Clutch 1 Minor Slip Detected

Typical Scan Tool Data


Variable Low Clutch Reference


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Slipping when Commanded ON

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 161 km/h (0 - 100 mph)

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 1 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 1 Status

Applied

Released

Applied

Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors the Clutch 1 Slip Speed for each Hybrid Transmission Mode Commanded state. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors clutch slip when the variable Low clutch is applied.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image The clutch pressure control solenoid valve 3 commanded pressure is at least 1800 kPa (261 psi) for 1 second. image The variable clutch torque estimated is greater than 200 N.m (148 lb ft).

image The variable clutch fill detected.

image The commanded mode is: image Reverse

image Dual Electric Motors

image Dual Electric Motors and ICE


Conditions for Setting the DTC


image The transmission control module detects Hybrid low clutch slip greater than 200 RPM for 63 seconds, 3 times within the same key cycle, repeated 30 seconds apart.

image Motor 1 or 2 are approaching overspeed limits due to clutch slip, the fault will set instantly.


Action Taken When the DTC Sets P179C is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC P179C is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Description and Operation

image Electronic Component Description

image Transmission Component and System Description image Transmission General Description

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Verify that DTC P0721, P0796, P0966, P0967, P0969, P0970, P0971, P0973, P0974, P0976, P0977, P215C, P2720, P2721, P2728, P2729, or P2730 is not set.

image If the DTC is set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

image If the DTC is not set

3. Perform the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check to verify correct fluid level and condition.

4. Perform the Line Pressure Check to verify correct oil pressure.

5. Operate the vehicle in Dual Electric Motors and Dual Electric Motors and ICE mode. The Clutch 1 Slip Speed parameter reading should be less than 200 RPM when the Clutch 1 Status parameter reading is Applied.

image If clutch slip speed is greater than 200 RPM

Refer to Component Testing.

image If clutch slip speed is less than 200 RPM

6. All OK


Component Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Verify control solenoid valve assembly condition by performing the Control Solenoid Valve Inspection.

3. Verify control solenoid valve assembly function by performing the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test.

image If a concern is found

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly.

image If no concern is found

4. Inspect the a/trans fluid level control valve for stuck closed or damaged condition.

image If you found a concern with the a/trans fluid level control valve

Replace the a/trans fluid level control valve.

image If no concern is found

5. Inspect the valve body components and hydraulic circuits listed below for a leak or a stuck valve, refer to

Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection:

image Control valve body spacer (w/gasket) plate assembly

image Variable Low clutch and drive motor/generator stator cooling regulator valve

image If you found a concern in the valve body

Repair or replace the valve or valve body.

image If no concern is found

6. Inspect the Variable Low clutch assembly snap ring, piston, clutch discs, and housing for a slipping or damaged condition.

image If you found a Variable Low clutch assembly concern

Repair or replace the Variable Low clutch assembly as necessary.

image If no concern is found

7. All OK


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement for control valve body replacement

image Refer to Variable Low Clutch Plate Removal, and Variable Low Clutch Plate Installation for Variable Low Clutch Assembly replacement

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement, programming, and setup. image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve

Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P179D: TRANSMISSION CLUTCH 2 MINOR SLIP DETECTED

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P179D

Transmission Clutch 2 Minor Slip Detected

Typical Scan Tool Data


Variable Hi Clutch Reference


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Slipping when Commanded ON

Operating Conditions: Vehicle speed 0 - 80 km/h (0 - 50 mph)


Parameter


Commanded ON


Commanded OFF

Slipping when Commanded ON

Parameter Normal Range: 0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 2 Slip Speed

0 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

0 - 6,000 RPM

Clutch 2 Status

Applied

Released

Applied


Circuit/System Description


The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors Clutch 2 Slip Speed for each Hybrid Transmission Mode Commanded state. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 monitors clutch slip when the variable high clutch is commanded ON.

Conditions for Running the DTC Variable high clutch is applied. Conditions for Setting the DTC

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects the variable high clutch adapt is exceeded 10 times.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets DTC P179D is a Type B DTC. Conditions for Clearing the DTC DTC P179D is a Type B DTC. Diagnostic Aids

When attempting to set transmission performance DTCs, observe the Freeze Frame and Failure Records to assist in duplicating the failure conditions. Ensure the transmission fluid level is correct and there are no leaks. If there are any other transmission DTCs set, diagnose those first.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

image Electronic Component Description image Transmission General Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections

image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON.

2. Verify that DTC P0721, P0723, P0776, P0777, P0966, P0967, P0969, P0970, P0971, P0973, P0974, P0976, P0977, P215C, P2720, P2721, P2728, P2729, or P2730 is not set.

image If the DTC is set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

image If the DTC is not set

3. Verify correct fluid level and condition by performing the Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check.

4. Verify correct oil pressure by performing the Line Pressure Check.

5. Operate the vehicle in Dual Motors mode. The Clutch 2 Slip Speed parameter reading should be less than 200 RPM when the Clutch 2 Status parameter reading is Applied.

image If clutch slip speed is greater than 200 RPM

Refer to Component Testing.

image If clutch slip speed is less than 200 RPM

6. All OK


Component Testing

1. Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Inspection to verify Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly condition.

2. Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Performance Test to verify Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly function.

image If a concern is found

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly.

image If no concern is found

3. Verify the a/trans fluid level control valve is not stuck, closed or in a damaged condition.

image If you found a concern with the a/trans fluid level control valve

Replace the a/trans fluid level control valve.

image If no concern is found

4. Verify the variable hi clutch and drive motor/generator stator cooling regulator boost valve is not sticking or damaged. Refer to Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection.

image If you found a concern with the variable hi clutch and drive motor/generator stator cooling

regulator boost valve

Repair or replace the valve or valve body.

image If no concern is found

5. Verify the variable hi clutch assembly piston, snap ring, and clutch discs are not in a damaged condition.

image If you found a variable hi clutch concern

Repair or replace the variable high clutch as necessary.

image If no concern is found

6. All OK


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Variable High Clutch Removal, and Variable High Clutch Installation for variable High Clutch replacement

image Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement for control valve body replacement image Refer to Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection

image Refer to Transmission Replacement for Transmission removal

image Refer to Control Module References for Control Solenoid Valve Assembly replacement image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P1824, P182A-P182F, P1838-P1841, P18B5-P18BA, P18BC, P18BF, P18C0, P18C2, OR P18C3: INTERNAL MODE SWITCH

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptors


DTC P1824

Internal Mode Switch P Circuit High Voltage

DTC P182A

Internal Mode Switch A Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P182B

Internal Mode Switch B Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P182C

Internal Mode Switch B Circuit High Voltage

DTC P182D

Internal Mode Switch P Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P182E

Internal Mode Switch Indicates Invalid Range

DTC P182F

Internal Mode Switch C Circuit High Voltage

DTC P1838

Internal Mode Switch A Circuit High Voltage

DTC P1839

Internal Mode Switch C Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P1840

Internal Mode Switch S Circuit Low Voltage

DTC P1841

Internal Mode Switch S Circuit High Voltage

DTC P18B5

Internal Mode Switch A Circuit Shorted

DTC P18B6

Internal Mode Switch B Circuit Shorted

DTC P18B7

Internal Mode Switch C Circuit Shorted

DTC P18B8

Internal Mode Switch P Circuit Shorted

DTC P18B9

Internal Mode Switch S Circuit Shorted

DTC P18BA

Internal Mode Switch A Stuck Off

DTC P18BC

Internal Mode Switch C Stuck Off

DTC P18BF

Internal Mode Switch A Stuck On

DTC P18C0

Internal Mode Switch B Stuck On

DTC P18C2

Internal Mode Switch P Stuck On

DTC P18C3

Internal Mode Switch S Stuck On

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

Transmission Range Signal A

P182A

P1838

P1838

P182E, P18B5

Transmission Range Signal B

P182B

P182C

P182C, P18B6

P182E, P18C0

Transmission Range Signal C

P1839

P182F

P182F, P18BC

P182E

Transmission Range Signal P

P182D

P1824

P1824

P182E, P18C2

Transmission Range Signal S

P1840

P1841

P182E, P1841, P18B9

P18C3

Typical Scan Tool Data


Internal Mode Switch A/B/C/P

Circuit

Normal Range

Short to Ground

Open

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Vehicle ON, range selector in Park

Internal Mode Switch A

1.62V - 2.49V

Less than 0.66V

Greater than 2.49V

Greater than 2.49V

Internal Mode Switch B

0.66V - 1.02V

Less than 0.66V

Greater than 2.49V

Greater than 2.49V

Internal Mode Switch C

1.62V - 2.49V

Less than 0.66V

Greater than 2.49V

Greater than 2.49V

Internal Mode Switch P

0.66V - 1.02V

Less than 0.66V

Greater than 2.49V

Greater than 2.49V

Internal Mode Switch S

0.66V - 1.02V

Less than 0.66V

Greater than 2.49V

Greater than 2.49V

Valid High = Switch open = 1.62V - 2.49V Valid Low = Switch Closed = 0.66V - 1.02V

Transmission Internal Mode Switch Logic


Gear Selector Position


Signal A


Signal B


Signal C


Signal P


Signal S

Gear

Selector Position


Signal A


Signal B


Signal C


Signal P


Signal S

Park (P)

High

Low

High

Low

Low

Reverse (R)

Low

High

High

Low

High

Neutral (N)

Low

High

Low

High

Low

Drive (D)

High

Low

Low

High

High

Low (L)

High

Low

Low

High

Low


Circuit/System Description


The transmission internal mode switch, often referred to as the automatic transmission manual shift shaft position switch, is a hall-effect switch attached to the transmission case within the transmission. The 5 outputs from the switch indicate which position is selected by the transmission manual shaft. Five outputs (A, B, C, P, S) are range selection inputs to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. The input voltage at the modules is high when the switch is open and low when the switch is closed to ground. The state of each input is displayed on the scan tool as Internal Mode Switch A/B/C/P/S. The Internal Mode Switch Range input parameters represented are transmission range signal A, signal B, signal C, and signal P signal S. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is internal to the power inverter module, often referred to as the drive motor generator power inverter module, and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image No Output Shaft Speed DTCs P0722 or P077B. image The system voltage is 9 - 32 V.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


Any one or more of the following conditions:

image The Internal Mode Switch signal circuit A, B, P or S are Low in Park for greater than 8 s. image The Internal Mode Switch signal circuit A is Low in D for 8 s.

image The Internal Mode Switch signal circuit C is High in D for 8 s.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 detects an invalid range from the Internal Mode Switch for 3.25 s. image The Internal Mode Switch signal circuit C is high in D for greater than 8 s.

image Park/Neutral Switch equals P/N and the Internal Mode Switch state is not Park or Neutral, or the Park/Neutral switch is not Park or Neutral and the Internal Mode Switch state equals Park or Neutral for 4 s.

image Or the transmission internal mode switch indicates a transitional state for 8 s.


Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image The PRNDL position indicator on the instrument cluster will be blank.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 may command neutral if multiple circuit faults exist.


Conditions for Clearing the DTC


image DTC P182E is a Type A DTC.

image DTCs P1824, P182A-P182D, P182F, P1838-P1841, P18B5-18B9, P18BA, P18BC, P18BF, P18C0, P18C2,

and P18C3 are Type B DTCs.

Diagnostic Aids


The transmission internal mode switch connects electrically to the control solenoid valve assembly. Inspect the transmission internal mode switch, harness, connector, and control solenoid assembly pins for metallic debris. Use a terminal test kit for any test that requires probing the control solenoid assembly harness connector or a component harness connector. The transmission internal mode switch can be damaged by currents exceeding 2 mA. Test the transmission internal mode switch for an open condition whenever a short to voltage condition is observed.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Vehicle ON, observe the scan tool Internal Mode Switch A/B/C/P parameter while moving the gear shift lever from Park, through all gear selector positions, and back to Park. The parameter should match each gear range that is selected. Refer to Transmission Internal Mode Switch Logic.

2. Verify all the Internal Mode Switch Status parameters display Valid while moving the gear shift lever from Park, through all gear selector positions, and back to Park.

image If any of the parameters display Invalid

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If all the parameters display valid

3. Verify all the Internal Mode Switch parameters display 1.62V - 2.49V when High and 0.66V - 1.02V when Low.

image If any of the parameters display outside of the specified range

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If all the parameters display within the specified range

4. Perform the Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment procedure to verify proper adjustment.

5. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.

6. Verify DTC P1824, P182A-P182F, P1838-P1841, P18B5-P18BA, P18BC, P18BF, P18C0, P18C2, or

P18C3 is not set.

image If any of the DTCs are set

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If none of the DTCs are set

7. All OK


Circuit/System Testing


NOTE: You must perform the Circuit/System Verification before proceeding with Circuit/System Testing.


1. Vehicle OFF, remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement.

2. Disconnect the harness connector at the B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch.

3. Vehicle in Service Mode.

4. Test for 8.3V to 9.4V between both 9 V reference circuits terminal 1, terminal 8 and ground.

image If not within the specified range

Test the voltage circuits for an open/high resistance end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, replace the A/Trans Wiring Extension Harness Assembly. image If 2 Ω or less, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If within the specified range

5. Vehicle ON.

6. Install a 3 A fused jumper wire between each signal circuit listed below and the 9 V reference circuit: image Switch Signal A: terminal 2 and terminal 1

image Switch Signal B: terminal 6 and terminal 8 image Switch Signal C: terminal 3 and terminal 1 image Switch Signal P: terminal 7 and terminal 8 image Switch Signal S: terminal 5 and terminal 8

7. Verify each scan tool Internal Mode Switch A/B/C/P/S voltage parameter displays 4.88 - 5.12 V when jumped.

image If any parameter does not display 4.88 - 5.12 V when jumped

Test the signal circuit for an open/short to voltage or short together.

image If an open/short to voltage or short together is found, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch.

image If an open/short to voltage or short together is not found, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If each signal circuit parameter displays 4.88 - 5.12 V when jumped

8. Replace the B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch.

Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.


NOTE: Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Inspection for the following components before replacing the components.


image Refer to Manual Shift Shaft and Manual Shift Detent Lever Replacement for B15 Transmission Internal Mode Switch, often referred to as the Automatic Transmission Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly, replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal for Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch replacement.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming and setup.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P215B: VEHICLE SPEED - OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED NOT PLAUSIBLE

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P215B

Vehicle Speed - Output Shaft Speed Not Plausible

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

OSS Supply Voltage

P0722, P0723

P0722, P0723

P0722, P0723

P0721, P215B

OSS Signal

P0722, P0723

P0722, P0723

P0722, P0723

P0721, P215B

Typical Scan Tool Data


Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor

Circuit

Normal Range

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Engine running, normal operating temperature

Signal

0 - 7,000 RPM

0 RPM

0 RPM

Supply Voltage

-

0 RPM

0 RPM

OSS Supply Voltage

Circuit

Normal Range

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Key ON, engine OFF or engine running, normal operating temperature

Circuit

Normal Range

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal

OK

OK

OK

Supply Voltage

OK

Out of range

Out of range

8.3 - 9.3 Volts = OK, Any other voltage = Out of range


Circuit/System Description


The A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly has 2 internal hall-effect type sensors, and is capable of sensing both speed and direction. The output speed sensor is internal to the transmission and mounts to the A/Trans case assembly and is connected to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 through the control solenoid valve assembly and transmission internal harness. The A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly faces the park gear machined teeth surface. The sensor receives 5.0 volts on the OSS supply voltage circuit from the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. As the output shaft rotates, the sensor produces a signal frequency based on the machined surface of the output shaft.

The two sensor elements in the output speed sensor assembly are spaced approximately 1/2 a tooth apart.

image When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, sensor A detects a particular tooth before sensor B. image When the vehicle is moving in a reverse direction, sensor B detects a particular tooth before sensor A.

The electronics in the sensor combine the two signals and send a signal with a different pulse width. This signal is interpreted by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 for speed and direction and is transmitted through the serial data circuits to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM, hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, compare the output speed sensor signal with the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor signal. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (12.42 mph). image The vehicle is not in Park or Neutral.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


ECM

The ECM OSS signal and the ABS wheel speed sensor signals differ by greater than 10 km/h (6.2 mph) for more than 25 ms.

Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1

The ECM OSS signal and the ABS wheel speed sensor signals differ by greater than 19 km/h (12 mph) for more than 10 seconds.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


ECM

image The ECM commands reduced vehicle power.

image PROPULSION POWER REDUCED message is displayed on the driver information center.

Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1

The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 requests the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 2 to open the high voltage contactor relays.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


ECM

P215B is a Type A DTC.

Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1

P215B is a Type A DTC.

Diagnostic Aids


The hybrid system is very sensitive to the OSS signal for overall operation.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Inspect for broken driveline components.

2. Operate the vehicle at 16-32 km/h (10-20 mph) while observing the Transmission OSS and ABS wheel parameters on the scan tool.

image ECM - The OSS signal and AS wheel speed signal displays should not vary by greater than 10 km/h (6.2 mph).

image Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 - The OSS and ABS wheel speed signal displays should not vary by greater than 19 km/h (12 mph).

Circuit/System Testing

1. Verify DTC C0035-C0050, C1207-C1210, C1221-C1228, C1232-C1235, C005A, C0245, C122E, P0721, P0723, U0073, U0074, U0077, U0101, U0129, or U1833 is not set.

image If any of the DTCs are set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

image If the DTCs are not set

2. Program the control module which set the DTC with the latest software version and retest for DTCs.

image If the DTC resets

Replace the control module which set the DTC.

image If the DTC does not reset

3. All OK.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for K20 ECM or T6 Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming, and setup.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module is replaced. image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming, and setup.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P215C: OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED - WHEEL SPEED NOT PLAUSIBLE

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P215C

Output Shaft Speed - Wheel Speed Not Plausible

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

OSS Supply Voltage

P215C

P0721, P215C

P0721, P215C

P077B, P0721, P215C

OSS Signal

P215C

P0721, P215C

P0721, P215C

P077B, P0721, P215C

Typical Scan Tool Data


Transmission OSS

Circuit

Normal Range

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Engine running, normal operating temperature

OSS Signal

0 - 7,000 RPM

0 RPM

0 RPM

OSS Supply Voltage

-

0 RPM

0 RPM

OSS Supply Voltage

Circuit

Normal Range

Open/High Resistance

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Key ON, Engine OFF or Engine running, normal operating temperature

OSS Signal

OK

OK

OK

OSS Supply Voltage

OK

Out of Range

Out of Range

8.3 - 9.3 Volts = OK, Any other voltage = Out of range

Circuit/System Description


The A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly has 2 internal hall-effect type sensors, and is capable of sensing both speed and direction. The output speed sensor is internal to the transmission and mounts to the A/Trans case assembly and is connected to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 through the control solenoid valve assembly and transmission internal harness. The A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly faces the park gear machined teeth surface. The sensor receives 5.0 volts on the OSS supply voltage circuit from the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. As the output shaft rotates, the sensor produces a signal frequency based on the machined surface of the output shaft.

The two sensor elements in the output speed sensor assembly are spaced approximately 1/2 a tooth apart.

image When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, sensor A detects a particular tooth before sensor B. image When the vehicle is moving in a reverse direction, sensor B detects a particular tooth before sensor A.

The electronics in the sensor combine the two signals and send a signal with a different pulse width. This signal is interpreted by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 for speed and direction and is transmitted through the serial data circuits to the engine control module (ECM). The ECM, hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, compare the output speed sensor signal with the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor signal. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is part of the drive motor generator power inverter module and is not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image The vehicle is moving.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 correlates the transmission output speed with the ABS wheel speed and motor speed to detect any failures in the transmission output speed sensor.

Conditions for Setting the DTC


image The difference between transmission output speed and the calculated average of output speed from the drive motors and ABS wheel speed sensors is greater than 50 RPM.

image The difference between the average of wheel speed sensors and drive motors and the output speed sensor is greater than 60 RPM.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P215C is a Type B DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 calculates output speed based drive motor 2 speed if ABS wheel speed is not available.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC P215C is a Type B DTC. Reference Information Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Electronic Component Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information. Special Tools

EL 38522 Variable Signal Generator

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

Circuit/System Verification


Operate the vehicle at 16 - 32 km/h (10 - 20 mph) while observing the Transmission OSS and ABS wheel parameters on the scan tool. The Transmission OSS and ABS wheel speed signal parameters should not vary by greater than 10 km/h (6 mph).

Circuit/System Testing

1. Verify DTC C0035-C0050, C1207-C1210, C1221-C1228, C1232-C1235, C005A, C0245, or C122E is not set

in the electronic brake control module.

image If the DTC is set

Refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) List - Vehicle .

2. Perform the Output Shaft Speed Input Test. image If the DTC does not set

3. All OK


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Perform the Drive Motor Removal - 2nd Position, and Drive Motor Installation - 2nd Position for OSS replacement.

image Refer to Control Module References for Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, also called the power inverter module replacement.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P2670 OR P2671: ACTUATOR HIGH CONTROL CIRCUIT GROUP 2 VOLTAGE

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check prior to using this diagnostic procedure: Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle

image Review the description of Strategy Based Diagnosis: Strategy Based Diagnosis

image An overview of each diagnostic category can be found here: Diagnostic Procedure Instructions


DTC Descriptor


DTC P2670

Actuator High Control Circuit Group 2 Low Voltage

DTC P2671

Actuator High Control Circuit Group 2 High Voltage

Diagnostic Fault Information



Circuit


Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance


Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

Ignition

P2670

P2671

P2670, P2671

-

Typical Scan Tool Data


High Side Drive 2

Circuit

Short to Ground

Open

Short to Voltage

Operating Conditions: Ignition On

Parameter Normal Range: On

High Side Driver 2

Off

On

Off

Circuit/System Description


The high side driver 2 is internal to the Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1. With the ignition On, the high side

driver 2 provides 12 V to the transmission control solenoid valve. If excessive current flow is detected in high side driver 2 circuit, the high side driver 1 will turn Off. When the circuit fault is corrected, the high side driver 1 will reset. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 and both drive motor control modules are internal to the power inverter module, often referred to as the drive motor generator power inverter module, and not serviced separately.

Conditions for Running the DTC


High side driver 2 is On. Conditions for Setting the DTC P2670

Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 has detected a short to ground on the high side driver 2 circuit during

Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 initialization.

P2671

Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 has detected a short to voltage on the high side driver 2 circuit during Hybrid/EV powertrain Control Module 1 initialization.

Actions Taken When the DTC Sets


P2670

image DTC P2670 is a Type A DTC.

image The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 inhibits clutch 2.

P2671

DTC P2671 is a Type B DTC.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


image DTC P2670 is a Type A DTC. image DTC P2671 is a Type B DTC.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

image COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

image INLINE HARNESS CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

image Electronic Component Description

image Transmission Component and System Description image Transmission General Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information.

Circuit/System Verification

1. Ignition ON.

2. Verify the scan tool High Side Driver 1 Command parameter displays On.

image If On is not displayed

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If On is displayed

3. Verify the parameters listed below do not display Malfunction when commanding the high side driver 2, On and Off with a scan tool.

image High Side Driver 2 Circuit Low Voltage Test Status image High Side Driver 2 Circuit Open Test Status

image High Side Driver 2 Circuit High Voltage Test Status

image If Multifunction is displayed

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If Multifunction is not displayed

4. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observe from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data.

5. Verify the DTC does not set.

image If the DTC sets

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If the DTC does not set

6. All OK.


Circuit/System Testing


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure includes the following steps:

image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Before working on any high voltage system, be sure to wear the following Personal Protection Equipment:

image Safety glasses with appropriate side shields when within 15 meters (50 feet) of the vehicle, either indoors or outdoors.

image Certified and up-to-date Class "0" Insulation gloves rated at 1000V with leather protectors.

image Visually and functionally inspect the gloves before use.

image Wear the Insulation gloves with leather protectors at all times when working with the high voltage battery assembly, whether the system is energized or not.

Failure to follow the procedures may result in serious injury or death.


1. Vehicle OFF, disable the high voltage at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

2. Remove the Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement.

3. Ignition OFF and all vehicle systems OFF, disconnect the X1 harness connector at the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.

4. Connect the 12 V battery.

5. Ignition ON, connect a test lamp between the high side driver circuit X1 terminal 7 and the ground.

6. Verify the test lamp turns ON.

image If the test lamp is always OFF

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module.

2. Test for infinite resistance between the control circuit and ground.

image If less than infinite resistance, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve.

image If infinite resistance

3. Test for less than 2 Ω in the control circuit end to end.

image If 2 Ω or greater, replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve. image If less than 2 Ω, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp is always ON

1. Ignition OFF, remove the test lamp, disconnect the harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module, ignition ON.

2. Test for less than 1 V between the control circuit and ground.

image If 1 V or greater, repair the short to voltage on the circuit. image If less than 1 V, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If the test lamp turns ON and OFF

7. Test or replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve.

Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming, and setup.

image Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal for Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module is replaced. image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

DTC P27A7: TRANSMISSION CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 CALIBRATION INCORRECT

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


DTC Descriptor


DTC P27A7

Transmission Control Solenoid Valve 1 Calibration Incorrect

Circuit/System Description


The transmission control solenoids in this transmission require unique electrical current vs. oil pressure performance matching data values in order to function at maximum performance and efficiency. This data is programmed and stored in the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1. When a transmission assembly, transmission line pressure control solenoid, or Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 is replaced, the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 must be programmed with the new or existing solenoid performance data.

Conditions for Running the DTC


image Ignition On.

image T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 has completed initialization.


Conditions for Setting the DTC


Transmission control solenoid valve 1 matching performance data is not programmed into the Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1.

Action Taken When the DTC Sets


image P27A7 is a Type A DTC. image The vehicle will not start.

Conditions for Clearing the DTC


P27A7 is a Type A DTC.

Diagnostic Aids


Obtain the replacement solenoid information code for the solenoid that was replaced, from the TIS Service Information web site.

Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Description and Operation

Electronic Component Description

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification


NOTE: P27A7 is a informational DTC.


NOTE: Solenoid performance data is only available for the variable force solenoid, not the On/Off solenoids.


1. If the T12 Automatic Transmission Assembly or the line pressure control solenoid was replaced.

image Obtain the solenoid performance data for the variable force solenoids from the TIS Service Information web site. Program the data into the existing T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1. Perform the Transmission Service Fast Learn Procedure.

image If the T12 Automatic Transmission was not replaced.

2. If the T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 was replaced.

image Obtain the existing solenoid performance data for the variable force solenoids from the TIS Service Information web site. Program the data into the new T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1. Perform the Transmission Service Fast Learn Procedure.

image If the T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 was not replaced.

3. If the line pressure variable force solenoid was replaced.

image Obtain the solenoid performance data from the TIS Service Information web site for the new solenoids. Program the data into the existing T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1.

Repair Instructions

Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair. image Perform the Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Hybrid/EV Powertrain Control Module 1 replacement, programming and setup.

SOLENOID VALVE CHARACTERIZATION REPROGRAMMING

The solenoids in this transmission require unique performance characteristic data in order to function at maximum efficiency. This data is programmed and stored in the vehicle's hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. When a transmission assembly, hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, valve body, or line pressure control solenoid are replaced during service, the performance characteristic data for the solenoids must be retrieved from a web server "cloud" repository and reprogrammed into the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1.

Reprogramming also ensures that the characteristic data relationship is properly matched between the solenoids, valve body, and transmission.

Solenoid characterization reprogramming is performed using the TIS2Web Service Programming System (SPS).

Solenoid Reprogramming Procedure


Perform solenoid characterization reprogramming after one of the following service procedures:


NOTE: Select "Replace Transmission" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.


image Replace transmission assembly


NOTE: Select "Replace Valve Body" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.


image Replace valve body assembly


NOTE: Select "Replace Solenoid" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.


image Replace solenoid - currently not an available Service Procedure


NOTE: Select "Refresh Characterization Data" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.


image Replace T6 Power Inverter Module


NOTE: Select "Refresh Characterization Data" at the MCVM Characterization selection screen.


image Solenoid characterization may also be performed to "refresh" characterization data.

To perform solenoid characterization after a transmission component replacement:

1. Document the new Transmission Unique Number (TUN) or Part Unique Number (PUN) as required. Refer to

Transmission Identification Information.

2. Log into TIS2Web/SPS.

3. Type the vehicle identification number (VIN).

4. Select "T6 Power Inverter Module - MCVM Operations".

5. Select the applicable service procedure performed and provide the necessary TUN or PUN. At this point, the system will read the VIN from the engine control module (ECM) using the multiple diagnostic interface (MDI) and then retrieve the applicable genealogy data tree from the cloud. This data tree accesses the original characterization data so that it may be updated with the new component information. The system acquires characterization data for the given TUN/PUN via the cloud and updates the genealogy tree. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 is updated with the correct solenoid characterization data, and the cloud is updated with the new genealogy relationship.

SYMPTOMS - AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

NOTE: Use the symptom tables only if the following conditions are met: image Refer to Diagnostic Starting Point - Vehicle .

image There are no DTCs set.

image The control modules can communicate via the serial data link.

image Review the system operation in order to familiarize yourself with the system functions. Refer to Transmission General Description, and Transmission Component and System Description.


Visual/Physical Inspection


Inspect the easily accessible or visible system components for obvious damage or conditions which could cause the symptom.

Intermittent


Faulty electrical connections or wiring may be the cause of intermittent conditions. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .

Symptom List

Refer to a symptom diagnostic procedure from the following list in order to diagnose the symptom: image Fluid Diagnosis

image Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check image Fluid Leak Diagnosis

image Noise and Vibration Diagnosis

image Whine/Growl Noise That Changes with Vehicle Speed image Noise in Drive or Reverse Gear

image Vibration

image Noise and Vibration Analysis

image Range Performance Diagnosis

image No Park or Drive

image No Drive in All Ranges image No Reverse Gear

image No Drive or Reverse Gear

image Shift Quality Feel Diagnosis

image Harsh Garage Shift

image Harsh, Soft, Delayed or Slipping Drive or Reverse Gear

image Shift Pattern

image No Drive in All Ranges

image No Drive or Reverse Gear

image Stuck in Drive or Reverse Gear

image Symptoms Not Found or No Symptom Detected

image Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check image Line Pressure Check

image Road Test

image Clutch Plate Diagnosis

image Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission image Case Porosity Repair

image Bushing and Mating Shaft Inspection

REGENERATIVE BRAKING ON DEMAND MALFUNCTION

Diagnostic Instructions


image Perform the Diagnostic System Check - Vehicle prior to using this diagnostic procedure. image Review Strategy Based Diagnosis for an overview of the diagnostic approach.

image Refer to Diagnostic Procedure Instructions to provide an overview of each diagnostic category.


Diagnostic Fault Information


Regenerative Braking On Demand


Circuit

Short to Ground

Open/High Resistance


Short to Voltage

Signal Performance

Normal Range = Inactive/Active


Regenerative Braking On Demand Switch Circuit


P152D

Regenerative Braking On Demand

Malfunction

Regenerative Braking On Demand

Malfunction


P152C

Circuit/System Description


Regenerative Braking On Demand enables drivers to actively re-capture energy when slowing down, such as when approaching slower traffic or setting up for a tight turn. To engage Regenerative Braking On Demand, the driver releases the accelerator pedal and pulls back on the left steering-wheel paddle to begin regenerating electricity. When engaged, Regenerative Braking On Demand provides vehicle deceleration that is greater than what a typical vehicle experiences while coasting or when the transmission shifter is in the L position, providing control and dynamic

performance characteristics similar to downshifting in a manual-transmission vehicle. The feature does not bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Releasing the paddle cancels the Regeneration on Demand request, allowing the vehicle to coast normally. The driver can engage and disengage Regeneration on Demand as desired and as traffic conditions allow. When Regenerative Braking On Demand is requested, a signal is sent to the Body Control Module and then to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 via serial data. The Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter is displayed as Inactive and Active on the scan tool. The Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter states are listed below:

image Inactive - when no switch is pressed

image Active - when the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left is activated.


Diagnostic Aids


The Regenerative Braking On Demand feature has a maximum of 60kW charging power. Performance may be reduced when the high voltage battery is cold and/or the high voltage battery is fully charged. The following conditions listed below will reduce or inhibit Regenerative Braking On Demand performance:

image The high voltage battery is warmer than 20°C (68°F), and battery state of charge is greater than 80%. image The high voltage battery is warmer than 10°C (50°F), and battery state of charge is greater than 75%. image The high voltage battery is warmer than 0°C (32F), and battery state of charge is greater than 60%.

image The high voltage battery is colder than -10°C (14°F).

image If the battery state of charge is greater than 90%, Regenerative Braking On Demand is inhibited.


Reference Information


Schematic Reference

Automatic Transmission Controls Schematics

Connector End View Reference

image COMPONENT CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

image INLINE HARNESS CONNECTOR END VIEWS - INDEX

Electrical Information Reference

image Circuit Testing

image Connector Repairs

image Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections image Wiring Repairs

DTC Type Reference

Powertrain Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Type Definitions

Scan Tool Reference

Control Module References for scan tool information

Circuit/System Verification

1. Verify with a scan tool the following hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter displays the correct values for the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left state:

image Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter displays Inactive when not activated. image Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter displays Active when activated.

image If the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 parameter is incorrect

Refer to Circuit/System Testing.

image If the Regenerative Braking On Demand parameter is correct

2. If the vehicle passes the Circuit/System Verification procedure then STOP. Do not perform the Circuit/System Testing or Component Testing as this may result in an unnecessary part replacement. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections .

Circuit/System Testing

1. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left wire harness connector. It may take up to 2 min for all vehicle systems to power down.

2. Test for less than 10 Ω between the following harness side ground circuit and ground: S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left X1 terminal 3.

image If 10 Ω or greater

Test for less than 2 Ω in the ground circuit end to end.

image If greater than 2 Ω, repair the Open/High resistance in the circuit. image If less than 2 Ω, repair the ground connection.

image If less than 10 Ω

3. Vehicle ON, test for 11 - 13 volts between X1 terminal 2 harness connector and ground.

image If not within the specified value

Test the voltage circuit end to end for a short to ground or an open/high resistance. If the circuit tests normal, replace the K9 BCM.

image If within the specified value

4. Vehicle OFF, test for 0.8 - 1.2 k Ω between terminal 1 and terminal 2 on the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left, with the switch closed.

image If not within the specified value

Replace the S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left.

image If within the specified value

5. Replace the K9 BCM.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the diagnostic procedure.

image Refer to Steering Wheel Replacement for S2L automatic transmission manual shift switch-left replacement.

image Refer to Control Module References for K9 body control module replacement, programming, and setup.

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION


image


Fig. 21: Control Solenoid Valve Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor

2

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 2

3

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 5

4

Electrical Connector - 8 Pins

5

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 3

6

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 4

1. Inspect the control solenoid valve assembly connectors and the 8 electrical connector pins for the following conditions:

image Damage image Bent pins image Debris

image Broken retaining tab image Contamination

2. Ensure no metallic debris is inside the connectors near the terminal pins.

3. Inspect the control solenoid valve assembly solenoid leads for contamination or metallic debris.

4. Inspect the control solenoid valve assembly filter plate and retaining tabs for cracks and ensure proper tension when a new filter plate is attached.

OUTPUT SHAFT SPEED INPUT TEST

Special Tools

EL 38522 Variable Signal Generator

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

The purpose of this test is to provide a simulated output speed sensor signal to the control solenoid valve assembly Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor input circuits in order to verify the control solenoid valve assembly is able to process the output speed sensor signal.

1. Vehicle OFF, remove the control valve body cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Removal.

2. Vehicle OFF, disconnect the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve from the OSS wiring harness.

3. Vehicle ON, test for 8.3 - 9.3 volts between terminals 1 and 2.

image If not within the specified range

Test the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve for an open, short to ground or short to voltage. If the harness tests OK, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If within the specified range

4. Vehicle OFF, using the EL 35616 terminal test kit, connect the EL 38522 variable signal generator red lead to the OSS signal circuit terminal 2 on the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve.

5. Connect the black lead from the EL 38522 variable signal generator to ground.

6. Set the EL 38522 variable signal generator to 8 volts, the frequency to 120 Hz, and the percent duty cycle to 50 or the normal position.

7. Vehicle ON, verify with a scan tool the Transmission OSS parameter is between 375 - 400 RPM.

image If not within the specified range

Replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

image If within the specified range

8. Test the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve for an open, short to ground or short to voltage.

image If Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve is shorted or open

Replace the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve harness.

image If all circuits test normal

9. Test or replace the B14A Transmission Output Shaft Speed Sensor.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal, and Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Installation.

image Refer to Drive Motor Removal - 2nd Position, and the Drive Motor Installation - 2nd Position for OSS replacement.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module replacement, programming, and setup.

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE PERFORMANCE TEST

The purpose of this procedure is to test the functionality of the control solenoid valve solenoids for a stuck open or stuck closed condition, or a faulty transmission fluid temperature sensor.

Preliminary Procedures

1. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle .

2. Remove the control solenoid valve assembly from the transmission. Refer to Control Solenoid Valve Replacement.

3. Perform the Control Solenoid Valve Inspection procedure.


Solenoid Testing Procedure


image


Fig. 22: Control Solenoid Valve Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Control Solenoid Valve

Callout

Component Name

Normal Resistance

Terminal

DTC/Symptom


1


Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor

Temperature Versus Resistance (Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor)


X1 Terminal 3, X1 Terminal 4


P0711, P0712, or P0713

2

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 2

23 - 24 Ω

X1 Terminal 2, X1 Terminal 7

P0964, P0966, or P0967

3

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 5

23 - 24 Ω

X1 Terminal 5, X1 Terminal 7

P2727, P2729, or P2730

Callout

Component Name

Normal Resistance

Terminal

DTC/Symptom

4

Electrical Connector - 8 Pins

-

-

-

5

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 3

23 - 24 Ω

X1 Terminal 8, X1 Terminal 7

P0968, P0970, or P0971

6

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 4

23 - 24 Ω

X1 Terminal 6, X1 Terminal 7

P2718, P2720, or P2721

DTC P0711, P0712, or P0713

1. Measure the transmission fluid temperature sensor resistance between X1 Terminal 3 and X1 Terminal 4, refer to Temperature Versus Resistance (Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor).

image If the resistance is not within the specified range

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly.

image If the resistance is within the specified range

2. Test the transmission internal harness for an open, short to ground, or short to voltage. If the transmission internal harness tests OK, replace the T6 Power Inverter Module.

DTC P079A, P079B, P079C, P07A3, P07A5, P179C, P179D

1. Measure each pressure control solenoid valve for 23 - 24 Ω.

image If the resistance is not within the specified range

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly.

image If the resistance is within the specified range

2. With a rubber tipped blow gun, pressurize the line pressure side of each solenoid fluid passage of the Q8 control solenoid valve assembly. When the solenoid is not energized, air should not leak out of the exhaust port.

3. One at a time, energize each solenoid with a 12 V source. With a rubber tipped blow gun, pressurize the line pressure side of each solenoid fluid passage of the Q8 control solenoid valve assembly. When the solenoid is energized, air should leak out of the exhaust port.

image If the Q8 control solenoid valve assembly fails any of the above tests

Replace the Q8 Control Solenoid Valve Assembly.

image If the Q8 control solenoid valve assembly passes the above tests

The concern is internal to the transmission.

4. Repair as necessary.


Repair Instructions


Perform the Diagnostic Repair Verification after completing the repair.

image Refer to Control Valve Assembly and Transmission Wiring Harness Removal for Q8 Control Solenoid Valve replacement.

image Refer to Control Module References for T6 Power Inverter Module, often referred to as the Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module, replacement, programming and setup.

image Perform the Reset Transmission Adapts following all transmission related repairs.

RESET TRANSMISSION ADAPTS

Reset Transmission Adapts is a procedure for automatic transmissions in which a series of tests are run to allow the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 to learn individual clutch characteristics. Once the clutch data is learned, Reset Transmission Adapts translates it into the adaptive data cells, which the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 uses for clutch control during shifts. The scan tool provides initiation of the Reset Transmission Adapts procedure. This procedure is to be used following transmission repair.

The Reset Transmission Adapts procedure must be performed when one of the following repairs have been made to the vehicle. Failure to perform the procedure after one of the following repairs may result in poor transmission performance, as well as transmission DTCs being set:

image Transmission internal service/overhaul image Valve body repair or replacement

image Control solenoid valve assembly replacement

image Hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 software/calibration update image Any service in response to a shift quality concern

NOTE: Ensure the following conditions are met before performing the Reset Transmission Adapts procedure:

image Drive wheels are blocked image Parking brake is applied image Service brake is applied

image Zero percent throttle and no external engine RPM control

image Transmission fluid temperature is between 70 - 115°C (158 - 239°F)

image Transmission gear selector has been cycled from Park to Reverse 3 times in order to purge air from the clutches.


NOTE: If at any time during the procedure, required conditions are not met, Reset Transmission Adapts may abort and the process may need to be started again from the beginning. If this occurs, the transmission will be left in a neutral state until the controller is shut down, vehicle OFF and remove the scan tool and wait for more than 30 seconds prior to re-try procedure. If the procedure repeatedly fails, a limit that engineering set is being exceeded and there is possibly a transmission hardware issue.


1. Use the scan tool to perform the Reset Transmission Adapts procedure. As the procedure is being performed, the scan tool data display will provide operator instructions. Follow the scan tool instructions as required.

2. Once the procedure is complete, vehicle OFF and power down the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. You will lose communication to the scan tool.

Ensure you exit back to the main screen in the scan tool, shut the scan tool OFF, and unplug it from the DLC or the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 may not shut down leaving the vehicle in a neutral state.

NOTE: When the Reset Transmission Adapts procedure is completed, the transmission will remain in a neutral state until the controller shuts down. If after 1 - 2 minutes of sitting, with the vehicle OFF and scan tool removed, the vehicle remains in a neutral state, disconnect the battery and wait 5 - 10 minutes and then connect the battery. Reverse and drive should return.


3. Vehicle ON. This will complete the Reset Transmission Adapts procedure.

4. Perform the Road Test.


Troubleshooting

If the Reset Transmission Adapts will not run and the above stated conditions have been met, ensure the following: image Transmission Fluid Temperature parameter is between 40 - 60°C (104 - 140°F).

image Brakes and brake switch are functioning properly. image No active DTCs.

image Park/Neutral position switch is properly adjusted and functioning.

image Line pressure control is able to provide 1000 kPa and is within specifications. image Vehicle is not moving, or vibrating excessively.

image Clutches are properly assembled.

CONTROL VALVE BODY DIAGNOSTIC INSPECTION

The purpose of this inspection procedure is to determine if the control valve body assembly is the cause of a transmission DTC or symptom concern. The table will assist you in identifying which component within the control valve body is associated with a particular DTC or symptom. The components within the control valve body are not serviced separately.

Component Testing


WARNING: Valve springs can be tightly compressed. Use care when removing retainers and plugs. Personal injury could result.


CAUTION: After cleaning the transmission components, allow to air dry. Do not use cloth or paper towels in order to dry any transmission components. Lint from the towels can cause component failure.


CAUTION: Do not reuse cleaning solvents. Previously used solvents may deposit sediment which may damage the component.


1. Remove the control valve body assembly. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement.

2. Clean and inspect all control valve body assembly components for the following conditions listed below: image Stuck or scored control valve

image Scored or damaged control valve body bore

image Broken, weak, or damaged control valve return spring image Missing, damaged, or stuck check ball

image Missing, restricted, or out of position modulated fluid pressure orifice image Missing or damaged control valve retainer

image Debris or sediment

image If a condition is found, and cannot be repaired by cleaning

Replace the control valve body assembly.

image If a condition is not found

3. All OK


Control Valve Body Assembly


image


Fig. 23: Control Valve Body Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

400

Pressure Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

401

Pressure Regulator Valve Bore Plug

402

Pressure Regulator Valve

403

Pressure Regulator Valve Spring

404

Lube Regulator Valve Spring

405

Lube Regulator Valve

406

Lube Regulator Valve Bore Plug

407

Lube Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

Callout

Component Name

408

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston Spring Retainer

409

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston Spring

410

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

411

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve Bore Plug Retainer

412

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Spring

413

Variable Low Clutch Valve

414

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Accumulator Piston

415

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Accumulator Piston Spring

416

Control Valve Body

417

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

418

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Spring

419

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

420

Variable High Clutch Valve

421

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Spring

422

Variable Low Clutch Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

423

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve

424

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve Spring

425

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve Bore Plug Retainer

426

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Retainer

427

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

428

Pressure Relief Ball Valve Spring Pin

429

Pressure Relief Ball Valve Spring

430

Pressure Relief Ball Valve


Control Valve Body Diagnostic Inspection

Callout

Component Name

DTC/Symptom Associated with Component

402 - A Bore

Pressure Regulator Valve

P079A, P079B, P179C, P179D

405 - B Bore

Lube Regulator Valve

Transmission/Drive Motor Overheating

410 - C Bore

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

P079A, P179C

413 - D Bore

Variable Low Clutch Valve

P079A, P07A3, P179C

417 - E Bore

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

Engine start/stop transitions

420 - F Bore

Variable High Clutch Valve

P079B, P07A5, P179D

423 - G Bore

Variable High Clutch Dam Feed Regulator Valve

P079B, P179D

427 - H Bore

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

P079A, P079B, P179C, P179D

430 -

Pressure Relief Ball Valve

P079A, Low Line Pressure

Repair Instructions


image Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement

image Refer to Solenoid Valve Characterization Reprogramming when the T6 Power Inverter Module, Valve Body, or Q23 Line Pressure Control Solenoid is replaced.

TRANSMISSION FLUID LEVEL AND CONDITION CHECK

This procedure checks both the transmission fluid level, as well as the condition of the fluid itself.


CAUTION: The transmission fluid level must be checked when the transmission fluid temperature is at 45 - 55°C (113 - 131°F). If the transmission fluid temperature is not at this range, operate the vehicle or allow the fluid to cool as required. Setting the transmission fluid level with fluid temperature outside this range will result in either an under or over-filled transmission. Fluid temperature higher than 55°C will result in an under-filled condition. Fluid temperature lower than 45°C will result in an over-filled condition. An under-filled transmission will cause premature component damage. An over-filled transmission may cause fluid to discharge out the vent tube, fluid foaming, pump cavitation, or overheating. Transmission overheating may result in loss of vehicle propulsion without warning.


Initial Fluid Level Confirmation


image


Fig. 24: Transmission Fluid Filler Cap And Fluid Level Hole Plug Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: Ensure the transmission has enough fluid in it to safely start the vehicle without damaging the transmission. With the vehicle off and the transmission fluid temperature at approximately 20 - 25°C (68 - 77°F), there must be at least enough fluid to drain out of the fluid level hole.


1. Verify if transmission service has been performed.

2. If no transmission repair has been performed and no leaks are evident, proceed directly to the Final Level Checking Procedure below.

3. Following any transmission service, remove the fluid filler cap (1) and the fluid level hole plug (2). image If the fluid is flowing as a steady stream, wait until the fluid begins to drip.

NOTE: Service replacement transmissions may come shipped with up to 3L (3.2 Q) of fluid.


image If no fluid comes out, add fluid until fluid drips out. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers , and Wire to Wire Repair - Engine Controls and Fuel .

4. Install the fluid level hole plug. Refer to Fastener Specifications (Off-Vehicle)Fastener Specifications (On-

Vehicle).


NOTE: You must confirm fluid level at the proper temperature range.


5. Perform the Final Level Checking Procedure below.

Final Level Checking Procedure


NOTE: You may have to open the hood to maintain engine operation.


1. Start the engine.

2. Allow the engine to idle in Park (P).


NOTE: If the transmission fluid temperature reading is not at the required temperature, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate range is reached. If the fluid temperature is below the specified range, driving the vehicle will raise the fluid temperature to the specification quicker than engine idling.


3. Keep the engine running and observe the transmission fluid temperature using the scan tool.

4. When the transmission fluid temperature is in the 45 - 55°C (113 - 131°F) range, move the shift lever through Park (P), Neutral (N) and Drive (D) 2 times and back to Park (P).

5. Raise the vehicle on a hoist. The vehicle must be level, with the engine running and the shift lever in the PARK range.


image


Fig. 25: Transmission Fluid Filler Cap And Fluid Level Hole Plug Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. While the vehicle is idling, remove the fluid level hole plug (2). Allow any fluid to drain. image If the fluid is flowing as a steady stream, wait until the fluid begins to drip.

image If no fluid comes out, add fluid until fluid drips out.

image Proper level is achieved when fluid slowly drips at a rate of 3 drips per second.

image Reinstall the fluid level hole plug. Refer to Fastener Specifications (Off-Vehicle)Fastener Specifications (On-Vehicle) .

7. Inspect the fluid color. The fluid should be red or dark brown.

image If the fluid color is very dark or black and has a burnt odor, inspect the fluid for excessive metal particles or other debris. Refer to Road Test to verify transmission operation. Change the transmission fluid if no other conditions are found.

image Fluid that is cloudy or milky or appears to be contaminated with water indicates engine coolant or water contamination. Refer to Engine Coolant/Water in Transmission .

8. Inspect for external leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis

9. If the fluid was changed, reset the transmission oil life monitor if applicable.

LINE PRESSURE CHECK

Special Tools


EN 21867-A Pressure Gauge

For equivalent regional tools refer to Special Tools

Main Line Pressure Check


image


Fig. 26: Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


WARNING: Keep the brakes applied at all times in order to prevent unexpected vehicle motion. Personal injury may result if the vehicle moves unexpectedly.


1. Install a scan tool.


NOTE: Depending on the hybrid/EV battery state of charge the engine may not start.

To start or keep the engine running open the hood.


2. Start the engine.

3. If the engine will not start, refer to Engine Will Not Crank - Crankshaft Will Not Rotate .

4. Inspect the transmission for the proper fluid level. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check.

5. Inspect the manual linkage at the transmission for proper function.

6. Turn the engine OFF.

NOTE: You may need to remove or disconnect components in order to gain access to the transmission line pressure test hole plug.


7. Remove the line pressure test hole plug.

8. Install the EN 21867-A pressure gauge.

9. Access the Scan Tool Transmission Output Controls for the Line Pressure Control Solenoid.

10. Start the engine.


NOTE: In order to achieve accurate line pressure readings, the following procedure must be performed at least 3 times in order to gather uniform pressure readings. Also if you do not have the hood open the engine may go in to AutoStop.

The scan tool is only able to control the line Pressure Control solenoid in PARK and NEUTRAL with engine speeds below 1500 RPM. This protects the clutches from extreme high or low line pressures.


11. Use the scan tool to increase and decrease the Line Pressure Control Solenoid in increments of approximately 100 KPa (15 psi). The scan tool commands the increment values automatically.

12. Allow the pressure to stabilize between increments.

13. Compare your pressure readings on the scan tool to those indicated on the EN 21867 - A pressure gauge.

14. If the pressure readings vary greatly, refer to Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Pressure High or Low

15. Install the pressure test hole plug. Tighten the pressure plug to 11 N.m (97 lb in).

DRIVE MOTOR POWER INVERTER MODULE FLUID SEAL PRESSURE TEST


image

Fig. 27: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal Pressure Test Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Install Drive Motor Power Inverter Module. Refer to:Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Installation.


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Coolant Pipe


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Procedure

1. Install the drive motor power inverter module coolant pipe and bolts. Tighten the bolts to 9

N.m (80 lb in).

2. Clamp GE-48494 adapter kit components to the coolant outlet pipe.

3. Plug the coolant inlet pipe with the GE-48494 adapter kit plug and clamp.

4. Apply 20 psi (138 kPa) pressure with J-24460-01 pressure tester.

5. Monitor the pressure tester gauge for 5 minutes and ensure that pressure remains at the specified value.

image If the specified pressure cannot be maintained, check the coolant hose and connections for leaks. If the coolant hose and connections check good, remove the drive motor power inverter module and replace the fluid seal.

image If pressure remains at the specified value, proceed to the next step.

6. Remove all GE-48494 adapter kit components.

Special Tools

image GE-48494 Power Electronics Pressure Test Adapter Kit

image GE-48494-10 Pressure Tester Kit

image J-24460-01 Cooling System Pressure Tester


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

ROAD TEST


NOTE: The Road Test Procedure should be performed only as part of the Symptom Diagnosis. Refer to Symptoms - Automatic Transmission.


The following test provides a method of evaluating the condition of the automatic transmission. The test is divided into the following parts:

image Low Voltage Electrical Function Check image Hydraulic Control Function Check

image High Voltage Electric Machine Control Function Check


NOTE: Complete the test in the sequence given.

Before the road test, ensure the following:

image The engine is performing properly.

image Transmission fluid level is correct. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check. image Tire pressure is correct.

image The high voltage battery is above 30% state of charge.

During the road test:

image Perform the test only when traffic conditions permit. image Operate the vehicle in a controlled, safe manner.

image Observe all traffic regulations.

image To view the scan tool data while conducting this test, take along qualified help in order to operate the vehicle safely, or review the data after the drive audit.

image Observe any unusual sounds or smells.

After the road test, check the following:

image Inspect for proper transmission fluid level. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check .

image Inspect for any diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) that may have set during the testing. Refer to the applicable DTC.

image Monitor the scan tool data for any abnormal readings or data. image Inspect for fluid leaks. Refer to Fluid Leak Diagnosis .

Low Voltage Electrical Function Check


Perform this procedure first in order to ensure the electronic transmission components are functioning properly. If these components are not checked, a simple electrical condition could be misdiagnosed.

1. Connect the scan tool.

2. Ensure the gear selector is in PARK and set the parking brake.

3. Start the vehicle. To ensure the engine starts, open the hood.

4. With a scan tool, monitor the transmission data parameters and compare them to typical scan tool data definitions.

Refer to Hybrid Powertrain Control Module Scan Tool Information for typical data values. Data that is questionable may indicate a concern.

5. Monitor transmission range on the scan tool data list.

1. Apply the brake pedal and ensure the parking brake is set.

2. Move the gear selector through all ranges.

3. Pause 2 to 3 seconds in each range.

4. Return gear selector to PARK.

5. Verify that all selector positions match the scan tool display.

6. Check accelerator position sensor input.

1. Apply the brake pedal and ensure the parking brake is set while monitoring accelerator pedal data.

2. Ensure the gear selector is in PARK.

3. Monitor the scan tool Accelerator Pedal Position while increasing and decreasing engine speed with the accelerator pedal. The scan tool Accelerator Pedal Position percentage should increase and decrease with engine speed.

If any of the above checks do not perform properly, record the result for reference after completion of the road test.

Hydraulic and Electric Machine Control Function Checks


NOTE: If in the above steps you opened the hood to start the engine make sure it is closed before driving the vehicle.


Charge vehicle to greater than 25% state of charge to enter EV only mode, if not already done. Perform the following steps while monitoring Hybrid/EV data list:

1. Drive vehicle at 35 mph at steady state.

2. Accelerate safely with 100% accelerator pedal to 55 mph, then drive at or above 55 mph.

1. Monitor for any excessive variable low clutch slip speed during acceleration.

3. Slow vehicle by shifting to LOW or pressing the regenerative braking button.

4. Switch vehicle to Hold Mode to start the engine (if needed) by pressing the Drive Mode Button 4 times.

5. Drive vehicle below 35 mph with stop-and-go city driving.

1. The engine will stop and start as needed.

2. Ensure smooth operation free of excessive vibrations.

6. Accelerate safely with 100% accelerator pedal to 55 mph, then drive at or above 55 mph.

1. Monitor for any excessive variable low clutch slip speed during acceleration.

2. Ensure variable high clutch engages during 55 mph steady state driving and monitor for slip.

7. Slow vehicle by shifting to LOW or pressing the regenerative braking button.

1. Ensure smooth deceleration as variable low clutch re-engages at lower vehicle speeds.


Reverse


Perform the following test safely:

1. With the vehicle stopped, move the gear selector to REVERSE.

2. Slowly accelerate the vehicle.

3. Verify that there is no noticeable slip, noise or vibration.

4. This test ensures the control system is properly applying torque in the reverse direction.

This procedure checks general functionality of the transmission. For diagnosing intermittent problems, try to duplicate the conditions of the original complaint. Refer to freeze frame records if a DTC set to determine the conditions.

CLUTCH PLATE DIAGNOSIS

Composition Plates

Dry the plates and inspect the plates for the following conditions: image Pitting

image Flaking

image Delamination - splitting or separation of bonded clutch material image Wear

image Glazing image Cracking image Charring

image Chips or metal particles embedded in the lining

Replace a composition plate which shows any of these conditions.

Steel Plates


Wipe the plates dry and check the plates for heat discoloration. If the surfaces are smooth, even if color smear is indicated, you can reuse the plate. If the plate is discolored with heat spots or if the surface is scuffed, replace the plate.

Causes of Burned Clutch Plates

The following conditions can result in a burned clutch plate: image Incorrect usage of clutch or apply plates

image Engine coolant or water in the transmission fluid image A cracked clutch piston

image Damaged or missing seals image Low line pressure

image Valve body conditions

image The valve body face is not flat. image Porosity is between channels.

image The valve bushing clips are improperly installed. image The checkballs are misplaced.

image The Teflon® seal rings are worn or damaged.

ENGINE COOLANT/WATER IN TRANSMISSION


CAUTION: The antifreeze or water will deteriorate the seals, gaskets and the glue that bonds the clutch material to the pressure plate. Both conditions may cause damage to the transmission.


If antifreeze or water has entered the transmission, perform the following:

1. Disassemble the transmission.

2. Replace all of the rubber type seals. The coolant will attack the seal material which will cause leakage.

3. Replace the composition-faced clutch plate assemblies. The facing material may separate from the steel center portion.

4. Replace all of the nylon parts - washers.

5. Replace the torque dampener.

6. Thoroughly clean and rebuild the transmission, using new gaskets and oil filter.

7. Flush the cooler lines after the transmission cooler has been properly repaired or replaced.

CASE POROSITY REPAIR

Some external leaks are caused by case porosity in non-pressurized areas. You can usually repair these leaks with the transmission in the vehicle.

1. Thoroughly clean the area to be repaired with a cleaning solvent. Air dry the area.


WARNING: Epoxy adhesive may cause skin irritations and eye damage. Read and follow all information on the container label as provided by the manufacturer.


2. Using instructions from the manufacturer, mix a sufficient amount of an epoxy to make the repair.

3. While the transmission case is still hot, apply the epoxy. You can use a clean, dry soldering acid brush to clean the area and also to apply the epoxy cement. Make certain that the area to be repaired is fully covered.

4. Allow the epoxy cement to cure for three hours before starting the engine.

5. Repeat the fluid leak diagnosis procedures.

BUSHING AND MATING SHAFT INSPECTION


NOTE: Proper bushing and corresponding mating shaft inspection should be performed before replacing the bushing, shaft, and in some cases, the component which houses the bushing. Thoroughly clean and dry the bushing and shaft surfaces before inspecting for damage.

Any of the following bushing conditions require replacement of the bushing and/or housing: image Discoloration due to heat distress

image Misalignment or displacement of bushing as a result of spinning in housing

image Medium to heavy scoring that can be easily detected with fingernail. Light scoring is a normal condition. image Debris embedded into the bushing lining material

image Obvious damage, including excessive and uneven wear

image Excessive polishing. Minor polishing of the bushing is an indication of normal wear and does not require replacement.

Any of the following conditions require replacement of the bushing's mating shaft: image Discoloration due to heat distress

image Rough surface finish that can be easily detected with finger

image Obvious shaft abnormalities, including warping or uneven surfaces image Obvious damage or cracking

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID PUMP PRESSURE HIGH OR LOW


Checks

Causes

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Motor

image Faulty fluid pump motor assembly image Faulty fluid pump motor wiring

image Low fluid level

image Inspect for leaking or damaged fluid pump outlet seal and fluid filter seal

Checks

Causes


image Inspect for improperly installed or damaged fluid filter


Control Solenoid Valve

image Inspect for leaking or damaged control solenoid valve seals image Inoperable control solenoid valve

image Inspect for damaged control solenoid electrical connector or wiring

image Inspect for damaged or worn control solenoid valve accumulator or accumulator bore


Control Valve Assembly

image Inspect for leaking or damaged control valve body spacer plate image Inspect for damaged or stuck open line pressure blow-off ball

valve

image Inspect for a sticky or stuck line pressure regulator valve

image Inspect solenoid module assembly for damage to plastic body or seal plate

image Inspect for other sticky or stuck valves within the control valve assembly

image Inspect for other leak paths within the line pressure hydraulic circuit or control valve solenoid hydraulic circuitry

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID LEAKS


Checks

Causes

Torque Dampener

Inspect for damage.


Case Assembly

image Inspect for porosity or damage on the sealing surfaces

image Inspect for loose oil cooler line bolts or damaged oil cooler line seals

image Inspect for damaged manual shift shaft seal

image Inspect for damaged or worn drive shaft oil seals on the axle shafts

image Inspect for loose pressure test plug and fluid level hole plug


Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Assembly

image Inspect for damaged torque dampener and differential housing assembly

image Inspect for porosity or damage on the sealing surfaces

image Inspect for damaged torque dampener and differential housing gasket

image Inspect for loose torque dampener and differential housing bolts image Inspect for damaged or worn drive shaft oil seals on the axle

shafts

Checks

Causes


Control Valve Body Cover

image Inspect for damaged or warped control valve body cover image Inspect for damaged fluid level control valve seal - gasket image Inspect for loose control valve body cover bolts.

FLUID LEAK DIAGNOSIS

General Method

1. Verify that the leak is transmission fluid.


CAUTION: Do not clean using brake cleaner or other reactive solvents as these solvents can damage rubber gaskets, seals and bushings.


2. Thoroughly clean the suspected leak area using a rag.

3. Operate the vehicle for 24 km (15 mi), or until normal operating temperatures are reached.

4. Park the vehicle over clean paper or cardboard.

5. Shut OFF the engine.

6. Look for fluid spots on the paper.

7. Make the necessary repairs.


Powder Method


CAUTION: Do not clean using brake cleaner or other reactive solvents as these solvents can damage rubber gaskets, seals and bushings.


1. Thoroughly clean the suspected leak area using a rag.

2. Apply an aerosol type leak tracing powder to the suspected leak area.

3. Operate the vehicle for 24 km (15 mi), or until normal operating temperatures are reached.

4. Shut OFF the engine.

5. Inspect the suspected leak area.

6. Trace the leak path through the powder in order to find the source of the leak.

7. Make the necessary repairs.


Dye and Black Light Method


A fluid dye and black light kit is available from various tool manufacturers.

1. Follow the manufacturer's instructions in order to determine the amount of dye to use.

2. Operate the vehicle for 24 km (15 mi) or until normal operating temperatures are reached.

3. Detect the leak with the black light.

4. Make the necessary repairs.


Find the Cause of the Leak


Pinpoint the leak and trace the leak back to the source. You must determine the cause of the leak in order to repair the leak properly. For example, if you replace a gasket, but the sealing flange is bent, the new gasket will not repair the

leak. You must also repair the bent flange. Before you attempt to repair a leak, check for the following conditions, and make repairs as necessary:

Gaskets

image Fluid level/pressure is too high

image Plugged vent or drain-back holes image Improperly tightened fasteners

image Dirty or damaged threads

image Warped flanges or sealing surface

image Scratches, burrs, or other damage to the sealing surface image Damaged or worn gasket

image Cracking or porosity of the component image Improper sealant used, where applicable image Incorrect gasket

Seals

image Fluid level/pressure is too high

image Plugged vent or drain-back holes image Damaged seal bore

image Damaged or worn seal image Improper installation image Cracks in component

image Manual shaft or output shaft surface is scratched, nicked, or damaged image Loose or worn bearing causing excess seal wear

Possible Points of Fluid Leaks


Control Valve Body Cover

image Incorrectly tightened bolts

image Improperly installed or damaged gasket/seal image Damaged mounting face

image Incorrect gasket seal

Case Leak

image Damaged manual shift shaft seal

image Loose or damaged oil cooler lines/seals image Worn or damaged drive shaft oil seal

image Loose line pressure plug or fluid level hole plug image Porous casting

image Warped torque dampener and differential housing

image Damaged torque dampener and differential housing gasket

Torque Dampener and Differential Housing

image Damaged torque dampener and differential housing gasket. image Worn or damaged drive shaft oil seal

image Porous casting of the torque dampener and differential housing

Leak at the Vent

image Overfilled system

image Water or coolant in the fluid; The fluid will appear milky image Transmission case porous

image Incorrect fluid level indicator causing an overfilled system image Plugged vent

WHINE/GROWL NOISE THAT CHANGES WITH VEHICLE SPEED


Checks

Causes

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

Inspect the bearing for wear or damage.


Output Carrier Thrust Bearing

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged pinion gears, pins, and rollers.

image Inspect for damaged thrust bearings. image Inspect for damaged sun gears.

image Inspect for damaged or stripped splines on the output carrier assembly.

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub Thrust Bearing

Inspect the bearing for wear or damage.

Front Differential Carrier

Inspect for damaged gears and bearings.

Front Differential Carrier Bearing

Inspect the bearing for wear or damage.

Drive Link Assembly

Inspect for damaged sprockets, bearings, and drive link.

NOISE IN DRIVE OR REVERSE GEAR


Checks

Causes

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

image Inspect for damaged or worn variable low clutch plates. image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch backing plate.

image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch backing plate retaining ring.

image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch piston assembly and spring.

Front Differential Carrier

Inspect for damaged gears and bearings.

Drive Link Assembly

Inspect for damaged sprockets, bearings, and drive link.

VIBRATION

Checks

Causes

Lug bolts for the Input Drive Flange

Inspect for loose bolts.

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

Inspect for wear or damage.

Output Carrier Thrust Bearing

Inspect the bearing for wear or damage.


Output Carrier

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged pinion gears, thrust washers, pins, and rollers.

image Inspect for a worn or damaged center support roller bearing assembly.

image Inspect for damaged thrust bearings.

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged output carrier rear sun gear thrust bearing (captured).

Front Differential Carrier

Inspect for damaged gears and bearings.

NOISE AND VIBRATION ANALYSIS

A noise or vibration that is noticeable when the vehicle is in motion MAY NOT be the result of the transmission.

If noise or vibration is noticeable in PARK and NEUTRAL with the engine at idle, but is less noticeable as RPM increases, the cause may be from poor engine performance.

image Inspect the tires for the following conditions: image Uneven wear

image Imbalance

image Mixed sizes

image Mixed radial and bias ply

image Inspect the suspension components for the following conditions: image Alignment wear or damage

image Loose fasteners

image Driveline damage or wear

image Inspect the engine and transmission mounts for damage and loose bolts.

image Inspect the transmission case mounting holes for the following conditions: image Missing bolts, nuts, and studs

image Stripped threads image Cracks

image Inspect the flywheel for the following conditions: image Missing or loose bolts

image Cracks

image Imbalance

image Inspect the input drive flange for the following conditions: image Missing or loose bolts or lugs

image Missing or loose balance weights

image Imbalance caused by heat distortion or fluid contamination

NO PARK OR DRIVE


Checks

Causes

Front Differential Carrier

Inspect for damaged gears and bearings.

Drive Link Assembly

Inspect for damaged sprockets, bearings, and drive link.

NO DRIVE IN ALL RANGES


Checks

Causes

Output Carrier

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged pinion gears, thrust washers, pins, and rollers.

image Inspect for damaged thrust bearings. image Inspect for damaged sun gears.

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged output carrier rear sun gear thrust bearing (captured).


Drive Motor - 2nd Position

Motor Failure

image Inspect connections at motor image Inspect motor end bearings

Thrust Bearing

Inspect the bearing for wear or damage.

Front Differential Carrier

Inspect for damaged gears and bearings.

Drive Link Assembly

Inspect for damaged sprockets, bearings, and drive link.

Front Differential Carrier Sun Gear

Inspect for spline wear or damage.


Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter

image Inspect for damaged or restricted fluid filter.

image Inspect for damaged fluid filter seal or improper sealing interface, leaks, and fluid aeration.

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Outlet Seal

Inspect for worn or damaged seal.

NO REVERSE GEAR


Checks

Causes

Output Carrier

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged pinion gears, thrust washers, pins, and rollers.

image Inspect for damaged thrust bearings. image Inspect for damaged sun gears.

image Inspect the carrier assembly for damaged output carrier rear sun gear thrust bearing (captured).


Drive Motor - 2nd Position

Motor Failure

image Inspect connections at motor image Inspect motor end bearings

Checks

Causes

Thrust Bearing

Inspect the bearing for wear or damage.

Front Differential Carrier

Inspect for damaged gears and bearings.

Drive Link Assembly

Inspect for damaged sprockets, bearings, and drive link.

Front Differential Carrier Sun Gear

Inspect for spline wear or damage.


Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter

image Inspect for damaged or restricted fluid filter.

image Inspect for damaged fluid filter seal or improper sealing interface, leaks, and fluid aeration.

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Outlet Seal

Inspect for worn or damaged seal.

NO DRIVE OR REVERSE GEAR


Checks

Causes

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

image Inspect for damaged or distorted clutch housing. image Inspect for damaged or distorted clutch plates.


Variable High Clutch Assembly

image Inspect for damaged or distorted clutch housing. image Inspect for damaged or distorted clutch plates.

HARSH, SOFT, DELAYED OR SLIPPING DRIVE OR REVERSE GEAR


Checks

Causes

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

image Inspect for damaged or worn variable low clutch plates. image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch backing plate.

image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch backing plate retaining ring.

image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch piston assembly and spring.


Variable High Clutch Assembly

image Inspect for damaged or worn variable high clutch plates. image Inspect for damaged variable high clutch backing plate.

image Inspect for damaged variable high clutch backing plate retaining ring.

image Inspect for damaged variable high clutch piston assembly and spring.


Control Valve Assembly

image Inspect solenoid module assembly for damage to plastic body, electrical connections and wire harness, or seal plate.

image Inspect low variable shift valve for stickiness or stuck condition. image Inspect for stuck or sticky compensator feed valve.

image Inspect for leak paths within the variable high or compensator feed hydraulic circuits.

Checks

Causes


image Inspect for leaking or damaged control valve body spacer plate. image Inspect for plugged control valve body spacer plate orifice(s).

STUCK IN DRIVE OR REVERSE GEAR


Checks

Causes

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

image Inspect for damaged or worn variable low clutch plates. image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch backing plate.

image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch backing plate retaining ring.

image Inspect for damaged variable low clutch piston assembly and spring.

HARSH GARAGE SHIFT


Checks

Causes

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Inspect for damaged or worn variable low clutch plates.

SEIZED ENGINE OR TRANSMISSION SEPARATION

Removal Procedure


WARNING: Do not use a service jack in locations other than those specified to lift this vehicle. Lifting the vehicle with a jack in those other locations could cause the vehicle to slip off the jack and roll; this could cause injury or death.


1. Ensure that the vehicle is properly supported and squarely positioned. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle .


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure will perform the following tasks: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Failure to follow the procedures exactly as written may result in serious injury or death.


2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection

3. Disable the high voltage system and disconnect the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack high voltage harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

4. Set the parking brake.

5. Remove the engine and transmission assembly from the vehicle. Refer to Engine Replacement , and

Transmission Replacement.

6. With the engine and transmission assembly on the cradle, support both the engine and transmission.


image

Fig. 28: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover And Water Outlet Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

7. Remove Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (1). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Removal

8. Remove Water Outlet (2). Refer to Water Outlet Replacement

image

image

9. Install Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (1). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Installation


image


Fig. 29: Hidden Torque Dampener And Differential Housing Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

10. Mark the location of the three hidden torque dampener and differential housing bolts 1 to 3.

11. With an air chisel, remove the torque dampener and differential housing material in order to gain access to the three hidden bolts.

12. With a 13 mm box end wrench, remove the torque dampener and differential housing bolts including the now exposed hidden bolts. (Qty: 16)


image

Fig. 30: Transmission Case And Torque Dampener And Differential Housing Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

13. With an appropriate hoist, separate the transmission case (1) from the torque dampener and differential housing (2).


image


Fig. 31: Input Internal Gear, Retaining Ring And Transmission Torque Dampener Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

14. Remove Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring (1)

15. Remove Input Internal Gear (2)

16. Remove Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolts (3) (Qty: 6)

17. Remove the torque dampener and differential housing to engine bolts.

18. Remove the torque dampener and differential housing from the engine.

19. Remove the input drive flange from the automatic transmission flex plate.


Installation Procedure

1. Determine the correct torque dampener thrust washer. Refer to Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement.

2. Using a NEW torque dampener and differential housing assembly, install the torque dampener and differential housing to the transmission case. Refer to Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Installation.

REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS - ON VEHICLE

TRANSMISSION CONTROL LEVER KNOB REPLACEMENT


image

Fig. 32: Transmission Control Lever Knob Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Transmission Control Lever Knob

Procedure

1. Release the lever boot from the 6 retainers (arrows).

2. Pull the knob with both hands upward with a twisting motion of max. 1 - 2 degrees to release from the transmission control lever.

3. Remove transmission control lever knob from the transmission control.


NOTE:

Considerable effort may be necessary to release the

Callout

Component Name


knob from the control lever.

TRANSMISSION CONTROL REPLACEMENT (WITH BASE)


image

Fig. 33: Transmission Control (With Base) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedures

1. Remove Transmission Control Lever Knob. Refer to Transmission Control Lever Knob Replacement

2. Remove Front Floor Console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement


WARNING:

After installing the transmission range selector shift cable, pull up and push down on ALL

connections to verify that

Callout

Component Name

the connections are fully seated and properly engaged.

Failure to perform this task can result in the vehicle not being able to shift into PARK

causing potential vehicle damage and bodily injury.


3. Disconnect Range Selector Lever Cable @ Transmission Control. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement

4. Disconnect the wiring harness connector and the wiring harness retainers.


1

Transmission Control Lever Housing Bracket Nut (Qty: 5)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)


2

Transmission Control

Procedure

1. Transfer parts as needed.

2. After the installation is complete perform a range selector lever cable adjustment. Refer to

Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment.

TRANSMISSION CONTROL REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT BASE)

Removal Procedure

1. Set the park brake.

2. Remove Front Floor Console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement

image

Fig. 34: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Control Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

3. Remove the range selector lever cable (1) from the transmission control. Release the cable from the bracket by pushing the retainer (arrow).

4. Disconnect the transmission control electrical connector.


image

Fig. 35: Nut And Washer

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Remove the nut and washer (1) from the control assembly.

image

Fig. 36: Main Shaft Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Remove the main shaft bolt (1).


image

Fig. 37: Transmission Control Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

7. Pull the transmission control assembly (1) rearward and upward to unseat it from the transmission control base.

8. Remove the transmission control assembly from the vehicle.


Installation Procedure

1. Position the transmission control assembly to the transmission control base.


image

Fig. 38: Transmission Control Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Push the transmission control assembly (1) downward and forward to seat it to the transmission control base.


NOTE: Ensure the flats of the bolt align with the transmission control assembly flat points inside the base before tightening the nut.


image

Fig. 39: Main Shaft Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

3. Install the main shaft bolt (1).

image

image

Fig. 40: Nut And Washer

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution .

image


NOTE: When installing the transmission control main shaft bolt, the face of the bolt must be held in the slot of the mounting bracket as the nut is torqued to ensure it remains seated and doesn't rotate out of the slot. Failure to perform this task can result in a loose shifter feel, squeaks & rattles, or excessive cross car lash resulting in a customer's poor perceived quality of the system.


4. Install the nut and washer (1) to the control assembly and tighten to 7 N.m (62 lb in).

5. Connect the transmission control electrical connector.


image

Fig. 41: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Control Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

WARNING: After installing the transmission range selector shift cable, pull up and push down on ALL connections to verify that the connections are fully seated and properly engaged. Failure to perform this task can result in the vehicle not being able to shift into PARK causing potential vehicle damage and bodily injury.


6. Install the range selector lever cable (1) to the transmission control.

7. Install Front Floor Console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement

8. Release the park brake.

9. Adjust the automatic transmission range selector lever cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment

DRIVE MOTOR GENERATOR POWER INVERTER MODULE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure


image


Fig. 42: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Remove Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (2). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Replacement

image

Fig. 43: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Remove Drive Motor Power Inverter Module (3). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Removal


Installation Procedure


image

Fig. 44: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module And Components

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Drive Motor Power Inverter Module (3). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Installation


image


Fig. 45: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Install Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (2). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Replacement

3. Program the power inverter module and the immobilizer control module. Refer to Control Module References

DRIVE MOTOR POWER INVERTER MODULE COVER REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools Removal Procedure

WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure will perform the following tasks: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Failure to follow the procedures exactly as written may result in serious injury or death.


1. Set the parking brake.

2. Disconnect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection

3. Disable the high voltage system and disconnect the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack high voltage harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .


image

Fig. 46: Radiator Surge Tank, Bracket And Clips Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Remove Radiator Surge Tank Clip (1)


NOTE: To remove the radiator surge tank from the radiator surge tank bracket move it in driving direction.


5. Move the radiator surge tank (4) in arrow direction to release the radiator surge tank clip (2) from the radiator surge tank bracket (3).

6. Relocate the radiator surge tank out of the way of the Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover and secure with tie strap.

image

Fig. 47: Range Selector Lever Cable And Range Selector Lever Cable Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

7. Remove Range Selector Lever Cable (1) @ Range Selector Lever Cable Lever


image

Fig. 48: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

8. Remove the range selector lever cable (1) from the range selector lever cable bracket.

Release the cable from the bracket by pushing the retainer (arrow).

image

Fig. 49: Drive Motor Battery Positive And Negative Cable Connector Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

9. Place a shop towel over the drive motor battery positive and negative cable connector (1) to prevent coolant from entering the cover.

10. Raise and support the vehicle. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle

11. Remove Front Wheelhouse Liner. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Left Side) Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Right Side)

12. Drain Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System. Refer to Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System Draining and Filling


image


Fig. 50: Coolant Hose And Clamp

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: The following 2 steps are necessary to prevent contamination of other components while removing residual coolant with shop air.


13. Loosen Clamp (2)

14. Disconnect Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose (1)

15. Lower the vehicle.


image

Fig. 51: Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Outlet Hose And Clamp Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

16. Loosen the drive motor generator power inverter module outlet hose clamp (2), using the BO-38185 pliers.

17. Remove the drive motor generator power inverter module outlet hose (1).

18. Using shop air, blow air through the drive motor power inverter module cooling outlet hose to remove residual coolant from the drive motor power inverter module.


image

Fig. 52: Drive Motor Battery Positive And Negative Cable Connector And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

19. Remove Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolts (1) (Qty: 4)

20. Remove Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector (2)

image

Fig. 53: Engine Wiring Harness Bracket Nut And Stud Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

21. Remove Engine Wiring Harness Bracket Nut (1)

22. Remove the engine wiring harness stud (2).


image


Fig. 54: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

23. Remove Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (2). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Removal

Installation Procedure

image


Fig. 55: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (2). Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Installation


image

Fig. 56: Engine Wiring Harness Bracket Nut And Stud Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution


2. Install the engine wiring harness stud (2) and tighten to 9 N.m (80 lb in).

3. Install and tighten Engine Wiring Harness Bracket Nut (1) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

image

Fig. 57: Drive Motor Battery Positive And Negative Cable Connector And Bolts (With Bolt Tightening Sequence)

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Install Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector (2)

5. Tighten Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolts (1) (Qty: 4) in sequence to 9 N.m (80 lb in)


image

Fig. 58: Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Outlet Hose And Clamp Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Install the drive motor generator power inverter module outlet hose (1).

7. Install the drive motor generator power inverter module outlet hose clamp (2), using the BO-38185 pliers.

image

Fig. 59: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

8. Install the range selector lever cable (1) to the range selector lever cable bracket.

The retainer snaps automatically in.


image

Fig. 60: Range Selector Lever Cable And Range Selector Lever Cable Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

9. Install Range Selector Lever Cable (1) @ Range Selector Lever Cable Lever

10. Adjust Range Selector Lever Cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment

image

Fig. 61: Radiator Surge Tank, Bracket And Clips Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

11. Remove the tie strap holding the radiator surge tank.


NOTE: To install the radiator surge tank to the radiator surge tank bracket move it against driving direction.


12. Move the radiator surge tank (4) in arrow direction to clip in the radiator surge tank clip (2) into the radiator surge tank bracket (3).

13. Install Radiator Surge Tank Clip (1)

14. Raise the vehicle.


image


Fig. 62: Coolant Hose And Clamp

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

15. Connect Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose (1)

16. Install Clamp (2)

17. Install Front Wheelhouse Liner. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Left Side) Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Right Side)

18. Fill Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System. Refer to Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System Draining and Filling

19. Lower the vehicle.

20. Enable the high voltage system and connect the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack high voltage harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Enabling .

21. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION RANGE SELECTOR LEVER REPLACEMENT


image

Fig. 63: Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedures

1. Set the parking brake.


WARNING:

After installing the transmission range selector shift cable, pull up and push down on ALL

connections


Callout

Component Name

to verify that the connections are fully seated and properly engaged.

Failure to perform this task can result in the vehicle not being able to shift into PARK

causing potential vehicle damage and bodily injury.


2. Remove Range Selector Lever Cable @ Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement


1

Transmission Range Selector Lever Nut


WARNING:

Hold the transmission range selector lever while removing or installing the lever retaining nut. Failure to hold the lever can cause damage to the transmission internal park system components which could allow the vehicle to

Callout

Component Name


roll when placed in the park position.


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


Tighten

30 N.m (22 lb ft)


2

Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever

Procedure

After the installation is complete perform a range selector lever cable adjustment. Refer to

Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment.

RANGE SELECTOR LEVER CABLE REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure

1. Set the parking brake.


image

Fig. 64: Range Selector Lever Cable And Range Selector Lever Cable Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Remove Range Selector Lever Cable (1) @ Range Selector Lever Cable Lever

image

Fig. 65: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

3. Remove the range selector lever cable (1) from the range selector lever cable bracket.

Release the cable from the bracket by pushing the retainer (arrow).

4. Remove Front Floor Console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement


image

Fig. 66: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Control Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Remove the range selector lever cable (1) from the transmission control.

Release the cable from the bracket by pushing the retainer (arrow).

6. Note the routing of the range selector lever cable.

image

Fig. 67: Range Selector Lever Cable And Grommet Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

7. Gently pry the grommet out, then remove the range selector lever cable (1) from the inside of the vehicle.


Installation Procedure


image

Fig. 68: Range Selector Lever Cable And Grommet Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Position the range selector lever cable in the vehicle.

2. Install the range selector lever cable grommet (1) into the panel.

image

Fig. 69: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Control Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

3. Install the range selector lever cable (1) to the transmission control.

The retainer snaps automatically in.

4. Install Front Floor Console. Refer to Front Floor Console Replacement


image

Fig. 70: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Install the range selector lever cable (1) to the range selector lever cable bracket.

The retainer snaps in automatically.

image

Fig. 71: Range Selector Lever Cable And Range Selector Lever Cable Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


WARNING: After installing the transmission range selector shift cable, pull up and push down on ALL connections to verify that the connections are fully seated and properly engaged. Failure to perform this task can result in the vehicle not being able to shift into PARK causing potential vehicle damage and bodily injury.


6. Install Range Selector Lever Cable (1) @ Range Selector Lever Cable Lever

7. Adjust Range Selector Lever Cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment

RANGE SELECTOR LEVER CABLE ADJUSTMENT

1. Set the parking brake.


image

Fig. 72: Retaining Collar And Range Select Cable Adjuster Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Pull the retaining collar (1) forward, then release the range select cable adjuster clip (2) by pushing out on the adjuster clip from the underneath.

image

Fig. 73: Range Selector Lever

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: Adjust the automatic transmission range selector lever cable while the transmission and the transmission control are in the Park position only. Failure to do so may cause false adjustment.


3. Verify the range selector lever (1) is in the park position.

Rotate the lever counterclockwise till the stop (arrow).


image

Fig. 74: Transmission Control Lever

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: Adjust the automatic transmission range selector lever cable while the transmission and the transmission control are in the park position only. Failure to do so may cause false adjustment.


4. Verify the transmission control lever (1) is in the park position.

image

Fig. 75: Retaining Collar And Adjuster Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Depress the adjuster clip (2) locking the adjuster clip completely, then release the retaining collar (1).


WARNING: After installing the transmission range selector shift cable, pull up and push down on ALL connections to verify that the connections are fully seated and properly engaged. Failure to perform this task can result in the vehicle not being able to shift into PARK causing potential vehicle damage and bodily injury.


6. Ensure that the cable adjuster is secured.

7. Check the transmission control lever in all gear selections for proper operation.

RANGE SELECTOR LEVER CABLE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

image

Fig. 76: Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Remove Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable @ Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever & Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement


1

Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Bolt (Qty: 2)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


Tighten

30 N.m (22 lb ft)


2

Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket

Procedure

After the installation is complete perform a range selector lever cable adjustment. Refer to

Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment.

TRANSMISSION FLUID DRAIN AND FILL

image

Fig. 77: Transmission Fluid Drain and Fill Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Remove Front Compartment Splash Shield. Refer to Front Compartment Splash Shield Replacement


1

Transmission Fluid Drain Plug


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


Tighten

11 N.m (97 lb in)


2

Transmission Fluid Filler Cap


NOTE:

image Transmission will require approximately

6.5 - 7 liters (7

- 7.4 quarts) of fluid.

image Fill the transmission to the proper

Callout

Component Name


level with NEW

transmission fluid. Refer to: Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE TEST HOLE PLUG REPLACEMENT


image

Fig. 78: Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedures

1. Remove Water Outlet. Refer to Water Outlet Replacement

2. Remove Front Underbody Air Deflector. Refer to Front Underbody Air Deflector Replacement

3. Remove Front Wheelhouse Liner (Left Side). Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Left Side)


1

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Callout

Component Name


Refer to Fastener Caution


Tighten

11 N.m (97 lb in)

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT SEAL REPLACEMENT - LEFT SIDE


image

Fig. 79: Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal - Left Side Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Remove Front Wheel Drive Shaft - Left Side. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement


1

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal

Procedure

Push the steering knuckle aside.


NOTE:

image For pushing the steering knuckle aside a 2nd

Callout

Component Name


technician is required.

image For seal removal use

GE-6125-1B

Slide Hammer with Adapter. with

GE-23129

Universal Seal Remover.

image For seal installation use

GE-8092

Driver Handle with DT-50301

Seal Installer.


Special Tools

image DT-50301 Seal Installer

image GE-6125-1B Slide Hammer with Adapter

image GE-8092 Driver Handle

image GE-23129 Universal Seal Remover


Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT SEAL REPLACEMENT - RIGHT SIDE

image

Fig. 80: Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal - Right Side Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedures

1. Remove Front Compartment Air Deflector. Refer to Front Compartment Air Deflector Replacement

2. Remove Front Wheel Drive Shaft - Right Side. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement


1

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Seal


NOTE:

image For seal removal use

GE-6125-1B

Slide Hammer with Adapter. with

GE-23129

Universal Seal Remover.

image For seal installation use

Callout

Component Name


GE-8092

Driver Handle with DT-50301

Seal Installer.


Special Tools

image DT-50301 Seal Installer

image GE-6125-1B Slide Hammer with Adapter

image GE-8092 Driver Handle

image GE-23129 Universal Seal Remover


Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

MANUAL SHIFT SHAFT SEAL REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

3. Remove Manual Shift Shaft Seal


Installation Procedure

1. Install Manual Shift Shaft Seal

image

2. Install Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

MANUAL SHIFT SHAFT AND SEAL REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


image DT-45201 Seal Remover

image DT-51672 Seal Installer

image

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

Removal Procedure

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

3. Remove Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

image

image

Fig. 81: Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin And Shaft Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

image

4. Remove Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin (7). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal

5. Remove Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft (9). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal


image

Fig. 82: Manual Shift Shaft Seal And Removal Tools Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Install the DT-45201 remover intermediate part (2) to the manual shift shaft seal (3)

7. Install the DT-45201 remover inner part (1) to the intermediate part and tighten carefully.

image

Fig. 83: Removal Tool Outer Part

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

8. Install the DT-45201 remover outer part (1) to the DT-45201 remover and tighten carefully in order to pull out the manual shift shaft seal.


image

Fig. 84: Manual Shift Shaft Seal And Removal Tool Outer Part Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

9. Remove the DT-45201 remover (1) along with the manual shift shaft seal (2).

10. Remove Manual Shift Shaft Seal @ DT-45201 remover.


Installation Procedure

image

Fig. 85: Manual Shift Shaft Seal

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Manual Shift Shaft Seal (1) using DT-51672 installer


image


image

Fig. 86: Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft And Pin Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

image

2. Install Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft (3). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Installation

3. Install Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin (5). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Installation

4. Install Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

5. Install Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

MANUAL SHIFT DETENT LEVER SHAFT REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove Range Selector Lever Cable @ Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement

3. Remove Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

4. Remove Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement


image

Fig. 87: Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin And Shaft Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Remove the manual shift detent lever pin (7) and the manual shift detent lever shaft (9). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal.

Installation Procedure


image


Fig. 88: Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft And Pin Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install the manual shift detent lever shaft (3) and the manual shift detent lever pin (5). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal.

2. Install Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

3. Install Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

4. Install Range Selector Lever Cable @ Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement

5. Adjust Range Selector Lever Cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment - Adjust

MANUAL SHIFT SHAFT AND MANUAL SHIFT DETENT LEVER REPLACEMENT

Removal Procedure

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Remove Range Selector Lever Cable @ Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement

3. Remove Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

4. Remove Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement


image

Fig. 89: Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin And Shaft Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Remove the manual shift detent lever pin (7) and the manual shift detent lever shaft (9). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal.

image


Fig. 90: Manual Shift Detent Lever, Spring And Manual Shift Shaft Pin Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Remove Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring (1)

7. Remove Manual Shift Shaft Pin (2)

8. Remove Manual Shift Detent Lever (3)


Installation Procedure


image


Fig. 91: Manual Shift Detent Lever, Spring And Manual Shift Shaft Pin Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Manual Shift Detent Lever (3)

2. Install Manual Shift Shaft Pin (2)

3. Install and tighten Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring (1) to 12 N.m (106 lb in)

image

Fig. 92: Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin And Shaft Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Install the manual shift detent lever pin (7) and the manual shift detent lever shaft (9). Refer to Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Installation.

5. Install Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin

6. Install Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

7. Install Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever Replacement

8. Install Range Selector Lever Cable @ Automatic Transmission Range Selector Lever. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Replacement

9. Adjust Range Selector Lever Cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment

CONTROL VALVE BODY COVER REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools Removal Procedure

1. Drain Engine Cooling System. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling

2. Remove Radiator Inlet Hose. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement

3. Remove Radiator Surge Tank (Drive Motor Battery Radiator Surge Tank). Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (Drive Motor Battery Radiator Surge Tank)

4. Remove Radiator Surge Tank (Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Surge Tank). Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Surge Tank)

image


Fig. 93: Radiator Inlet Hose, Hose Clamps And Retainer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Loosen Radiator Inlet Hose Clamps (1) (Qty: 3) using BO-38185 pliers

6. Disconnect Retainer (3)

7. Remove Radiator Inlet Hose (2)


image

Fig. 94: Radiator Inlet Hoses And Retainer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

8. Disconnect Retainer (2)

9. Position the 2 radiator inlet hoses (1) aside to gain access.

image

Fig. 95: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose And Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

10. Remove Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bolt (1)

11. Position the heater water shutoff inlet hose (2) aside to gain access.

12. Drain the transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Fill

13. Remove the front wheelhouse liner - left side. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Left Side)


image

Fig. 96: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet And Outlet Pipe Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

14. Remove Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet and Outlet Pipe Clip (1)

image

Fig. 97: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe, Bolt And Sealing Washer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

15. Remove Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt (1)

16. Disconnect Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe (3)

17. Remove and DISCARD Sealing Washer (2)

18. Position the transmission fluid cooler inlet pipe aside to gain access to the control valve body cover bolts.


image

Fig. 98: Control Valve Body Cover, Bolts And Gasket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

19. Place a container beneath the control valve body cover (2) to catch spilling transmission fluid.

20. Remove Control Valve Body Cover Bolts (3) (Qty: 16)

21. Remove Control Valve Body Cover (2)


NOTE: The gasket is reusable, inspect the gasket and replace if damaged.


22. Remove Control Valve Body Cover Gasket (1)


Installation Procedure

image

Fig. 99: Control Valve Body Cover, Bolts And Gasket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: The gasket is reusable, inspect the gasket and replace if damaged.


1. Install Control Valve Body Cover Gasket (1)

2. Install Control Valve Body Cover (2)


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution


3. Install Control Valve Body Cover Bolts (3) (Qty: 16) and Hand tighten only.


image

Fig. 100: Control Valve Body Cover Bolts Tightening Sequence Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Tighten Control Valve Body Cover Bolts in sequence (Qty: 16) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

image

Fig. 101: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe, Bolt And Sealing Washer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Reposition Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe (3)

6. Install a NEW sealing washer (2).

7. Connect Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe (3)

8. Install and tighten Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt (1) to 22 N.m (16 lb ft)


image

Fig. 102: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet And Outlet Pipe Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

9. Install Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet and Outlet Pipe Clip (1)

10. Install the front wheelhouse liner - left side. Refer to Front Wheelhouse Liner Replacement (Left Side)

image

Fig. 103: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose And Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

11. Position the heater water shutoff inlet hose (2) into original position.

12. Install and tighten Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bolt (1) to 22 N.m (16 lb ft)


image

Fig. 104: Radiator Inlet Hoses And Retainer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

13. Position the 2 radiator inlet hoses (1) into original position.

14. Connect Retainer (2)

image


Fig. 105: Radiator Inlet Hose, Hose Clamps And Retainer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

15. Install Radiator Inlet Hose (2)

16. Connect Retainer (3)

17. Tighten Radiator Inlet Hose Clamps (1) (Qty: 3) using BO-38185 pliers

18. Install Radiator Surge Tank (Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Surge Tank). Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Surge Tank)

19. Install Radiator Surge Tank (Drive Motor Battery Radiator Surge Tank). Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement (Drive Motor Battery Radiator Surge Tank)

20. Install Radiator Inlet Hose. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement

21. Fill Engine Cooling System. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling

22. Fill the transmission to the proper level with NEW transmission fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Level and Condition Check

CONTROL VALVE BODY REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools Removal Procedure

1. Remove Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

image

Fig. 106: Control Valve Body Bolts, Control Solenoid Valve And Filter Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Disconnect the control solenoid valve wiring harness.

3. Remove Control Valve Body Bolts (1) (Qty: 4)

4. Remove Control Solenoid Valve (2)

5. Remove Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate (3)


image

Fig. 107: Control Valve Body Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Disconnect the control valve body wiring harness.

7. Remove Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt (1)

8. Remove Fluid Transfer Pipe (2)

9. Remove Control Valve Body Bolts (3) (Qty: 13)

10. Remove Control Valve Body (4)

11. Remove Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Retainer (5) (Qty: 2)

12. Remove and DISCARD Control Valve Lower Body Spacer Plate (6)

13. Remove and DISCARD Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal (7)


Installation Procedure


image

Fig. 108: Control Valve Body Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: Install a NEW seal.


1. Install NEW Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal (7)


NOTE: Install a NEW spacer plate.


2. Install NEW Control Valve Lower Body Spacer Plate (6)

3. Install Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Retainer (5) (Qty: 2)

4. Install Control Valve Body (4)


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution


5. Install and hand tighten Control Valve Body Bolts (3) (Qty: 13). Hand tighten only.

6. Install Fluid Transfer Pipe (2)

7. Install and hand tighten Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt (1). Hand tighten only.

8. Connect the control valve body wiring harness.

image


Fig. 109: Control Valve Body Bolt And Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt Tightening Sequence Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

9. Tighten Control Valve Body Bolts @ Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt in sequence to 9 N.m (80 lb in)


image

Fig. 110: Control Valve Body Bolts, Control Solenoid Valve And Filter Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

10. Install Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate (3)

11. Install Control Solenoid Valve (2)

12. Install and hand tighten Control Valve Body Bolts (1) (Qty: 4). Hand tighten only.

13. Connect the control solenoid valve wiring harness.

image


Fig. 111: Control Valve Body Bolts Tightening Sequence Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

14. Tighten Control Valve Body Bolts in sequence to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

15. Install Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

LINE PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools Removal Procedure

1. Remove Control Valve Body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement


image


Fig. 112: Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve And Retainer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Remove Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Retainer (2)

3. Remove Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (1)


Installation Procedure


image


Fig. 113: Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve And Retainer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (1)

2. Install Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Retainer (2)

3. Install Control Valve Body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools Removal Procedure

1. Remove Control Valve Body. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

image

Fig. 114: Control Valve Body Bolts, Control Solenoid Valve And Filter Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Disconnect Control Solenoid Valve Wiring Harness

3. Remove Control Valve Body Bolts (1) (Qty: 4)

4. Remove Control Solenoid Valve (2)

5. Remove Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate (3)


Installation Procedure


image

Fig. 115: Control Valve Body Bolts, Control Solenoid Valve And Filter Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate (3)

2. Install Control Solenoid Valve (2)


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution


3. Install and hand tighten Control Valve Body Bolts (1) (Qty: 4). Hand tighten only.

4. Connect Control Solenoid Valve Wiring Harness

image


Fig. 116: Control Valve Body Bolts Tightening Sequence Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Tighten Control Valve Body Bolts in sequence to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

6. Install Control Valve Body Cover. Refer to Control Valve Body Cover Replacement

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WIRING HARNESS REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools Removal Procedure

1. Disconnect Battery Negative Cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection

2. Remove Control Valve Body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement


image

Fig. 117: Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness And Seals Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

NOTE: Remove the manual shift detent lever spring to aid in removal of the transmission wiring harness.


3. Remove Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve (1)

4. Remove Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal (2)

5. Remove Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch (3)

6. Remove Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal (4)


Installation Procedure


image

Fig. 118: Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness And Seals Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal (4)

2. Install Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch (3)

3. Install Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal (2)


NOTE: Install the manual shift detent lever spring previously removed to aid the removal of the transmission wiring harness.


4. Install Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve (1)

5. Install Control Valve Body. Refer to Control Valve Body Replacement

6. Connect Battery Negative Cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection

TRANSMISSION MOUNT STRUT BRACKET REPLACEMENT

image

Fig. 119: Transmission Mount Strut Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Using a suitable jack stand, support the rear of the powertrain.


1

Transmission Mount Strut Bolt


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution


Procedure

Always use NEW bolts. - Do NOT reuse old bolts.

Tighten

image First Pass: 100 N.m (74 lb ft) image Final Pass: 60 - 75 degrees

Callout

Component Name



Special Tools

EN-45059 Angle Meter

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools


2

Transmission Mount Strut Bracket Bolt (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution


Procedure

Always use NEW bolts. - Do NOT reuse old bolts.

Tighten

image First Pass: 75 N.m (55 lb ft) image Final Pass: 45 - 60 degrees


Special Tools

EN-45059 Angle Meter

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

3

Transmission Mount Strut Bracket

TRANSMISSION MOUNT TRANSMISSION-SIDE BRACKET REPLACEMENT

image

Fig. 120: Transmission Mount Transmission-Side Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Remove Transmission Mount. Refer to Transmission Mount Replacement


1

Transmission Mount Transmission Side Bracket Bolt (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution


Procedure

Always use NEW bolts. - Do NOT reuse old bolts.

Tighten

image First Pass: 58 N.m (43 lb ft) image Final Pass: 60 - 75 degrees

Callout

Component Name



Special Tools

EN-45059 Angle Meter

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

2

Transmission Mount Transmission Side Bracket

TRANSMISSION MOUNT REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


EN-45059 Angle Meter

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

Removal Procedure

1. Remove Engine Wiring Harness Junction Block. Refer to Engine Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement


image

Fig. 121: Wiring Harness Connectors

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Remove Wiring Harness Connectors (1) (Qty: 3)

Unclip (Qty: 6)

image

Fig. 122: Wiring Harness Retainers

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

3. Remove Wiring Harness Retainers (1) (Qty: 2)


image

Fig. 123: Wiring Harness Connector And Retainers Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Remove Wiring Harness Connector (2) @ Retainers (1)

5. Unclip Wiring Harness Retainer (3)

image

Fig. 124: Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket And Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Remove Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Bolt (1)

7. Remove Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket (2)


image

Fig. 125: Engine Lifting Chain And Engine Lift Rear Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

8. Install the engine lifter (1) to the engine lift rear bracket (2).

9. Apply tension to the chain.

image

Fig. 126: Transmission Mount And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

10. Prior to removing the mount, mark the mount location using paint pent or a marker for correct positioning during installation.

11. Remove and DISCARD Transmission Mount Bolts (2) (Qty: 3)

12. Remove Transmission Mount Transmission Side Bolt (4)

13. Remove and DISCARD Transmission Mount Bolt (1) (Qty: 3)

14. Remove Transmission Mount (3)


Installation Procedure


image

Fig. 127: Transmission Mount And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Install Transmission Mount (3)


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution


CAUTION: Refer to Torque-to-Yield Fastener Caution

NOTE: Install NEW bolts.


2. Install NEW Transmission Mount Bolts (1) (Qty: 3). Hand tighten only.

CAUTION: Refer to Torque-to-Yield Fastener Caution NOTE: Install NEW bolts.

3. Install NEW Transmission Mount Bolts (2) (Qty: 3). Hand tighten only.

4. Align the transmission mount and the powertrain unit to the previously made marks.

5. Tighten Transmission Mount Bolts (1) (Qty: 3)

1. First Pass: 100 N.m (74 lb ft)

2. Final Pass: 60 - 75 degrees, use the EN-45059 meter

6. Tighten Transmission Mount Bolts (2) (Qty: 3)

1. First Pass: 100 N.m (74 lb ft)

2. Final Pass: 60 - 75 degrees, use the EN-45059 meter

7. Install and tighten Transmission Mount Transmission Side Bolt (4) to 58 N.m (43 lb ft)


image

Fig. 128: Engine Lifting Chain And Engine Lift Rear Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

8. Remove the engine lifter (1) from the engine lift rear bracket (2).

image

Fig. 129: Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket And Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

9. Install Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket (2)

10. Install and tighten Engine Wiring Harness Fuse Block Bracket Bolt (1) to 22 N.m (16 lb ft).


image

Fig. 130: Wiring Harness Connector And Retainers Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

11. Install Wiring Harness Retainer (3)

12. Install Wiring Harness Connector (2) @ Retainer (1)

image

Fig. 131: Wiring Harness Retainers

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

13. Install Wiring Harness Retainers (1) (Qty: 2)


image

Fig. 132: Wiring Harness Connectors

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

14. Install Wiring Harness Connectors (1) (Qty: 3)

Install (Qty: 6)

15. Install Engine Wiring Harness Junction Block. Refer to Engine Wiring Harness Junction Block Replacement

TRANSMISSION REAR MOUNT REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


CH-51999 Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

Removal Procedure

1. Remove the drivetrain and front suspension cradle from the vehicle. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Cradle Replacement


image


Fig. 133: Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

2. Assemble the CH-51999 Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer (1 through 8) onto the transmission rear mount and the drivetrain and front suspension cradle.

3. Turning the nut (8), release the transmission rear mount from the drivetrain and front suspension cradle.


image

Fig. 134: Transmission Rear Mount, Drivetrain And Front Suspension Cradle Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Remove the transmission rear mount (1) from the drivetrain and front suspension cradle (2).


Installation Procedure


image


Fig. 135: Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer Receiver Cup, Transmission Mount And Alignment Mark Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

1. Clean the CH-51999 Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer receiver cup (3) free from oil and grease.

2. Position the transmission mount (2) into the receiver cup with the arrow on the transmission mount aligning with the alignment mark (5).


image

Fig. 136: Upper Tool Rim With Top Of Receiver Cup Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

NOTE: The transmission mount will be at the correct depth in the receiver cup, when the upper tool rim (a) is in the contact with the top of the receiver cup (b).


IMPORTANT: No lubricant is allowed.


3. Using a press or the threaded rod assembly, and the components (1, 4) shown from the CH-51999 Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer kit. Compress the transmission mount (2) into the receiver cup (3).

4. Clean the hole for the transmission rear mount in the drivetrain and front suspension frame cradle.


image


Fig. 137: Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: Insure the transmission mount inside the receiver cup (6) is in the correct orientation before proceeding.


5. Assemble the CH-51999 Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer (1 through 9) onto the drivetrain and front suspension cradle.


NOTE: When the rim on the tool (5) contacts the top edge of tool (6) completely, the transmission mount will be at it's correct depth in the drivetrain and front suspension cradle.


6. Turning the nut (1), install the transmission rear mount to the drivetrain and front suspension cradle.

7. Remove the CH-51999 Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer (1 through 9) from the drivetrain and front suspension cradle.

8. If the transmission rear mount is not positioned correctly, remove the transmission rear mount from the drivetrain and front suspension frame cradle and reinstall it.

9. Install the drivetrain and front suspension cradle to the vehicle. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Cradle Replacement

TRANSMISSION MOUNT STRUT REPLACEMENT

image

Fig. 138: Transmission Mount Strut

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedures

1. Using a suitable jack stand, support the rear of the powertrain.

2. Remove Transmission Mount Strut Bracket. Refer to Transmission Mount Strut Bracket Replacement


1

Transmission Mount Strut Bolt


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution


Procedure

Always use NEW bolts. - Do NOT reuse old bolts.

Tighten

Callout

Component Name


image First Pass: 100 N.m (74 lb ft) image Final Pass: 60 - 75 degrees


Special Tools

EN-45059 Angle Meter

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

2

Transmission Mount Strut

TRANSMISSION REPLACEMENT

Special Tools


image BO-38185 Hose Clamp Pliers

image DT-51504 Seal Protector

image EN-45059 Angle Meter

Equivalent regional tools: Special Tools

Removal Procedure


WARNING: Do not use a service jack in locations other than those specified to lift this vehicle. Lifting the vehicle with a jack in those other locations could cause the vehicle to slip off the jack and roll; this could cause injury or death.


WARNING: Always perform the High Voltage Disabling procedure prior to servicing any High Voltage component or connection. Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

The High Voltage Disabling procedure will perform the following tasks: image Identify how to disable high voltage.

image Identify how to test for the presence of high voltage.

image Identify condition under which high voltage is always present and personal protection equipment (PPE) and proper procedures must be followed.

Failure to follow the procedures exactly as written may result in serious injury or death.


1. Ensure that the vehicle is properly supported and squarely positioned. Refer to Lifting and Jacking the Vehicle .

2. Disable the high voltage system and disconnect the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack high voltage harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling .

3. Set the parking brake.

image

Fig. 139: Radiator Surge Tank And Bracket Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Remove Radiator Surge Tank Bracket Clip (2)

5. Remove the radiator surge tank (1) from the vehicle. Refer to Radiator Surge Tank Replacement


image

Fig. 140: Range Selector Lever Cable And Range Selector Lever Cable Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

6. Remove Range Selector Lever Cable (1) @ Range Selector Lever Cable Lever

image

Fig. 141: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

7. Remove the range selector lever cable (1) from the range selector lever cable bracket.

Release the cable from the bracket by pushing the retainer (arrow).

8. Remove Radiator Inlet Hose. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement

9. Drain Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System. Refer to Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System Draining and Filling

10. Remove the drive motor generator control module cooling outlet hose. Refer to Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose Replacement (Underbody Line) Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose Replacement (Underbody Line to Traction Power Inverter Module Inlet)


image

Fig. 142: Wiring Harness Bracket And Nut Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

11. Remove Nut (2)

12. Remove Wiring Harness Bracket (1)


image

Fig. 143: Electrical Connector

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

13. Disconnect Electrical Connector (1)


image

Fig. 144: Wiring Harness Bracket And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

14. Remove Bolts (1) (Qty: 2)

15. Remove Wiring Harness Bracket (2)

image

Fig. 145: Ground Cable And Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

16. Remove Ground Cable Bolt (1)

17. Remove Ground Cable (2)

18. Install Engine Support Fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture


image

Fig. 146: Transmission Mount Bolts

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

19. Remove and DISCARD Transmission Mount Bolts (1) (Qty: 3)

image

Fig. 147: Heater Inlet Hose Bracket And Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

20. Remove Bolt (1)

21. Remove Heater Inlet Hose Bracket (2)

22. Remove Drivetrain and Front Suspension Cradle. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Cradle Replacement

23. Drain Transmission Fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Fill

24. Remove the left and right wheel drive shafts. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement


image

Fig. 148: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet And Outlet Pipe Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

25. Remove Clip (1)

image

Fig. 149: Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe, Bolt And Sealing Washer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

26. Place a container beneath the transmission fluid cooler outlet pipe (2) to catch spilling transmission fluid.

27. Remove Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt (1)

28. Disconnect Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe (2)

29. Remove and DISCARD Sealing Washer (3)


image

Fig. 150: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe, Bolt And Sealing Washer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

30. Place a container beneath the transmission fluid cooler inlet pipe (3) to catch spilling transmission fluid.

31. Remove Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt (1)

32. Disconnect Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe (3)

33. Remove and DISCARD Sealing Washer (2)

image

Fig. 151: Heater Water Auxiliary Pump Inlet Hose, Clamp, Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bracket And Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

34. Loosen Heater Water Auxiliary Pump Inlet Hose Clamp (3) using BO-38185 pliers

35. Remove Heater Water Auxiliary Pump Inlet Hose (4)

36. Remove Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bracket Bolt (1)

37. Remove the heater water shutoff valve inlet hose and bracket (2) from the front side of the vehicle.


image

Fig. 152: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Electrical Connector, Inlet Hose, Retainer, Heater Water Shutoff Valve Outlet Hose And Clamp

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

38. Disconnect the heater water shutoff valve electrical connector (4).

39. Loosen Retainer (5)

image

Fig. 153: Bracket And Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

40. Remove Bolt (1)

41. Loosen the bracket (2).


image

Fig. 154: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Electrical Connector, Inlet Hose, Retainer, Heater Water Shutoff Valve Outlet Hose And Clamp

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

42. Remove Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose (1) @ Heater Water Shutoff Valve

43. Loosen the heater water shutoff valve outlet hose clamp (2), using the BO-38185 pliers.

44. Remove the heater water shutoff valve outlet hose (3) with the heater water shutoff valve.

image

Fig. 155: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose And Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

45. Remove Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose (2) @ Clip (1)

46. Remove Heater Water Shutoff Valve @ Vehicle

47. Remove Heater Coolant Pump. Refer to Heater Coolant Pump Replacement


image

Fig. 156: Starter Opening Cover And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

48. Remove Bolts (2) (Qty: 2)

49. Remove the starter opening cover (1).

image

Fig. 157: Torque Converter Bolts

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

50. Remove the torque converter bolts. (1) (Qty: 4)


image

Fig. 158: Upper Front Transmission Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

51. Remove the upper front transmission bolts (1) (Qty: 2).

image

Fig. 159: Upper Rear Transmission Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

52. Remove the upper rear transmission bolts (1) (Qty: 2).

53. Support the transmission with a suitable jack.

54. Using a suitable straps or chains, secure the transmission to the transmission jack.


image

Fig. 160: Transmission Cover And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

55. Remove the transmission bolts. (1) (Qty: 2)

56. Remove Transmission Cover (2)

image

Fig. 161: Transmission Bolts

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

57. Remove the transmission bolts. (1) (Qty: 2)

58. Carefully lower the transmission along with the jack, closely watching hoses and wiring harnesses to not disturb.


image

Fig. 162: Transmission Locating Pins

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

59. Ensure the transmission locating pins (1) are properly seated in the engine block and not damaged.

60. Transfer parts as needed.

61. Flush and flow test the fluid cooler and lines. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test and Flushing


Installation Procedure


NOTE: The alignment hole is oblong and is slightly smaller than the other holes in the engine flex plate.


1. Set engine to any top dead center (TDC). This puts the alignment hole in the starter pocket.

Do not tighten bell housing bolts at this time. There must be a small 1 mm (0.039 in) to 2

IMPORTANT: mm (0.079 in) mm gap between the engine and transmission to allow rotation for input flange alignment.


2. Install 2 guide pins into the lower engine block holes where the locating pins are to guide the transmission into place.

3. Position the transmission in the vehicle on the locating pins leaving a small gap between the engine and transmission.


CAUTION: Refer to Fastener Caution


image

Fig. 163: Transmission Bolts

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

4. Remove the guide pins, then Install the 2 transmission bolts (1) (Qty: 2) and hand tighten, allowing a small 1 mm (0.039 in) to 2 mm (0.079 in) mm gap between the engine and transmission.


image

Fig. 164: Transmission Cover And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

5. Install Transmission Cover (2)

6. Install the 2 transmission bolts (1) (Qty: 2) and hand tighten, allowing a small 1 mm (0.039 in) to 2 mm (0.079 in) mm gap between the engine and transmission.


image

Fig. 165: Transmission Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

7. Remove the guide pin, then install the transmission bolt (1) and hand tighten, allowing a small 1 mm (0.039 in) to 2 mm (0.079 in) mm gap between the engine and transmission.


image

Fig. 166: Torque Converter Bolts

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


NOTE: Once the Loctite® has been applied to the bolts it will 'SET IN APPROXIMATELY IN 10 MINUTES' and will fully cure in 24 hours.


8. Apply blue Loctite® on the torque converter bolt (1). Hand start bolt a few threads in the oblong alignment hole.

9. Tighten all lower transmission bolts to 58 N.m (43 lb ft).

10. Install Heater Coolant Pump. Refer to Heater Coolant Pump Replacement

image

Fig. 167: Upper Front Transmission Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

11. Install the upper front transmission bolts (1) (Qty: 2) and tighten to 58 N.m (43 lb ft).


image

Fig. 168: Upper Rear Transmission Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

12. Install the upper rear transmission bolts (1) (Qty: 2) and tighten to 58 N.m (43 lb ft).

13. Tighten torque converter bolt to 60 N.m (44 lb ft). Rotate the engine to the next hole. Apply blue Loctite® on the three remaining torque converter bolts. Install and tighten the bolts to 60 N.m (44 lb ft).

image

Fig. 169: Starter Opening Cover And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

14. Install the starter opening cover (1) and the 2 bolts (2) (Qty: 2).


image

Fig. 170: Bracket And Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

15. Install the bracket (2).

16. Install and tighten Bolt (1) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

image

Fig. 171: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose And Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

17. Install Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose (2) @ Vehicle

18. Install Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose (2) @ Clip (1)


image

Fig. 172: Heater Water Shutoff Valve Electrical Connector, Inlet Hose, Retainer, Heater Water Shutoff Valve Outlet Hose And Clamp

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

19. Install the heater water shutoff valve outlet hose (3) with the heater water shutoff valve.

20. Install the heater water shutoff valve outlet hose clamp (2), using the BO-38185 pliers.

21. Install Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose (1) @ Heater Water Shutoff Valve

22. Install Retainer (5)

23. Connect the heater water shutoff valve electrical connector (4).

image

Fig. 173: Heater Water Auxiliary Pump Inlet Hose, Clamp, Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bracket And Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

24. Install Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bracket (2)

25. Install and tighten Heater Water Shutoff Valve Inlet Hose Bracket Bolt (1) to 22 N.m (16 lb ft)

26. Install Heater Water Auxiliary Pump Inlet Hose (4)

27. Install Heater Water Auxiliary Pump Inlet Hose Clamp (3) using BO-38185 pliers


image

Fig. 174: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe, Bolt And Sealing Washer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

28. Install a NEW sealing washer. (2)

29. Connect Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet Pipe (3) - Connect

30. Install and tighten Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt (1) to 22 N.m (16 lb ft)

image

Fig. 175: Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe, Bolt And Sealing Washer Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

31. Install a NEW sealing washer. (3)

32. Connect Transmission Fluid Cooler Outlet Pipe (2)

33. Install and tighten Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Bolt (1) to 22 N.m (16 lb ft)

34. Install the left and right wheel drive shafts. Refer to Front Wheel Drive Shaft Replacement


image

Fig. 176: Transmission Fluid Cooler Inlet And Outlet Pipe Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

35. Install Clip (1)

36. Install Drivetrain and Front Suspension Cradle. Refer to Drivetrain and Front Suspension Cradle Replacement

37. Install Radiator Inlet Hose. Refer to Radiator Inlet Hose Replacement

image

Fig. 177: Heater Inlet Hose Bracket And Bolt Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

38. Install Heater Inlet Hose Bracket (2)

39. Install and tighten Bolt (1) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)


image

Fig. 178: Transmission Mount Bolts

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


CAUTION: Refer to Torque-to-Yield Fastener Caution NOTE: Install NEW bolts.

40. Install NEW Transmission Mount Bolts (1) (Qty: 3). Hand tighten only.

41. Tighten Transmission Mount Bolts (1) (Qty: 3)

1. First Pass: 100 N.m (74 lb ft)

2. Final Pass: 60 - 75 degrees, use the EN-45059 meter

42. Remove Engine Support Fixture. Refer to Engine Support Fixture

image

Fig. 179: Ground Cable And Bolt

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

43. Install Ground Cable (2)

44. Install and tighten Ground Cable Bolt (1) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)


image

Fig. 180: Wiring Harness Bracket And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

45. Install Wiring Harness Bracket (2)

46. Install and tighten Bolts (1) (Qty: 2) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

47. Lower the vehicle.

image

Fig. 181: Electrical Connector

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

48. Connect Electrical Connector (1)


image

Fig. 182: Wiring Harness Bracket And Nut Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

49. Install Wiring Harness Bracket (1)

50. Install and tighten Nut (2) to 9 N.m (80 lb in)

image

Fig. 183: Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose And Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

51. Install the drive motor generator control module cooling outlet hose. Refer to Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose Replacement (Underbody Line) Drive Motor Generator Control Module Cooling Outlet Hose Replacement (Underbody Line to Traction Power Inverter Module Inlet)

52. Fill Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System. Refer to Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module Cooling System Draining and Filling

53. Fill Transmission Fluid. Refer to Transmission Fluid Drain and Fill

54. Fill Cooling System. Refer to Cooling System Draining and Filling


image

Fig. 184: Range Selector Lever Cable And Transmission Range Selector Lever Cable Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

55. Install the range selector lever cable (1) to the range selector lever cable bracket.

The retainer snaps automatically in.

image

Fig. 185: Range Selector Lever Cable And Range Selector Lever Cable Lever Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

56. Install Range Selector Lever Cable (1) @ Range Selector Lever Cable Lever

57. Adjust Range Selector Lever Cable. Refer to Range Selector Lever Cable Adjustment


image

Fig. 186: Radiator Surge Tank And Bracket Clip Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

58. Install Radiator Surge Tank (1)

59. Install Radiator Surge Tank Bracket Clip (2)

60. Enable the high voltage system and connect the A4 Hybrid/EV Battery Pack high voltage harness connector at the T6 Power Inverter Module. Refer to High Voltage Disabling

61. Connect the battery negative cable. Refer to Battery Negative Cable Disconnection and Connection

62. Program the power inverter module and the immobilizer control module. Refer to Control Module References

REPAIR INSTRUCTIONS - OFF VEHICLE

HOLDING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

image


Fig. 187: Holding Fixture Assembly

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Â


WARNING:

Handle with care, the transmission assembly weighs over 183 Kg (403

lbs). Bodily injury could occur if not handled properly.


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Procedure

1. Use the supplied template to relocate holes on the fixture for mounting blocks.

2. Adjust mounting blocks on DT-46625 Holding Fixture to match bosses on case and

Callout

Component Name


tighten to 13 N.m (115 lb in).

Special Tools

image DT-03289-20 Holding Fixture Base Assembly

image DT-46625 Holding Fixture

image DT-46625-20 Holding Fixture Adapters


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

DRIVE MOTOR POWER INVERTER MODULE COVER REMOVAL

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Removal


image

Fig. 188: Drive Motor Battery Positive And Negative Cable Connector Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolt (Qty: 4)

2

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Removal

image


Fig. 189: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Bolt (Qty: 17)


2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover

Procedure

Use the DT-51626 protector when removing the cover to avoid damaging the connector seal.

Special Tools

DT-51626 Seal Protector

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Gasket


NOTE:

The gasket is reusable, inspect the gasket and replace if damaged.

4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Vent


5

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Electrical Connector Seal


NOTE:

The seal is reusable,

Callout

Component Name


inspect the seal and replace if damaged.

DRIVE MOTOR POWER INVERTER MODULE REMOVAL


image

Fig. 190: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module And Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

1. Disconnect the 3 drive motor power inverter module connectors.

2. Using shop air, blow air through the drive motor power inverter module cooling passage on the transmission to remove residual coolant.

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Buss Bar Bolt (Qty: 6)

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Bolt (Qty: 7)

3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module


4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal


NOTE:

DISCARD

the seal.

CONTROL VALVE BODY COVER REMOVAL

image

Fig. 191: Control Valve Body Cover

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Control Valve Body Cover Bolt (Qty: 16)

2

Control Valve Body Cover


3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal


NOTE:

The gasket is reusable, inspect the gasket and replace if damaged.


4

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal - O-ring


NOTE:

The seal is reusable, inspect the seal and replace if damaged.

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY AND TRANSMISSION WIRING HARNESS REMOVAL

Control Solenoid Valve Removal

image

Fig. 192: Control Solenoid Valve

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

1. Disconnect the control solenoid valve wiring harness.

2. Remove the connectors from the wiring harness brackets and shift detent lever.

1

Control Valve Body Bolt (Qty: 4)

2

Control Solenoid Valve


3

Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate


NOTE:

The filter plate is reusable, inspect the filter plate and replace if damaged.

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

1. Disconnect the control solenoid valve wiring harness.

2. Remove the connectors from the wiring harness brackets and shift detent lever.

1

Control Valve Body Bolt (Qty: 4)

2

Control Solenoid Valve


3

Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate


NOTE:

The filter plate is reusable, inspect the filter plate and replace if damaged.

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

1. Disconnect the control solenoid valve wiring harness.

2. Remove the connectors from the wiring harness brackets and shift detent lever.

1

Control Valve Body Bolt (Qty: 4)

2

Control Solenoid Valve


3

Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate


NOTE:

The filter plate is reusable, inspect the filter plate and replace if damaged.

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Control Solenoid Valve Removal


Control Valve (with Body and Valve) Removal

image

Fig. 193: Control Valve (With Body And Valve) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Control Valve (with Body and Valve) Removal

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Disconnect the transmission wiring harness from the control valve body.

1

Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt

2

Fluid Transfer Pipe

3

Control Valve Body Bolt (Qty: 13)

4

Control Valve (with Body and Valve)

5

Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Retainer (Qty: 2)

6

Control Valve Lower Body Spacer Plate

7

Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Removal

image

Fig. 194: Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Removal

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

1. Disconnect the wiring harness connector from the manual shift detent lever and remove the connectors from the wiring harness brackets noting location for installation.

2. Remove the manual shift detent lever spring to aid in removal of the transmission wiring harness.

1

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve

2

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal

3

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch

4

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE DAMPENER AND DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING REMOVAL

image

Fig. 195: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener And Differential Housing Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt (Qty: 16)


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing


NOTE:

The input internal gear assembly could stick to the torque dampener and differential housing.


3

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Gasket


NOTE:

DISCARD

the gasket.

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER REMOVAL

image

Fig. 196: Front Differential Carrier

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Front Differential Carrier Bearing

2

Front Differential Carrier

3

Front Differential Carrier Sun Gear

4

Differential Carrier Sun Gear Thrust Bearing

INPUT SUN GEAR SHAFT REMOVAL

image

Fig. 197: Input Sun Gear Shaft

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

2

Input Sun Gear Shaft Assembly

3

Input Sun Gear Retaining Ring

4

Input Sun Gear

5

Input Sun Gear Shaft


6

Variable High Clutch Housing Seal


NOTE:

DISCARD

the seal.

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER BAFFLE REMOVAL

image

Fig. 198: Front Differential Carrier Baffle Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Front Differential Carrier Baffle Bolt (Qty: 2)

2

Front Differential Carrier Baffle

3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Chip Collector Magnet

DRIVE SPROCKET, DRIVEN SPROCKET, AND DRIVE LINK REMOVAL

image

Fig. 199: Drive Sprocket, Driven Sprocket And Drive Link Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Sprocket, Driven Sprocket, and Drive Link


NOTE:

Inspect the bearing that is pressed into the driven sprocket. If the bearing is loose, replace the driven sprocket.

2

Driven Sprocket Bearing

DRIVE LINK SNUBBER REMOVAL

image

Fig. 200: Drive Link Snubber

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Link Snubber Bolt (Qty: 2)

2

Drive Link Snubber


3

NOTE:

A plastic washer is used on the bolts during initial assembly.

These washers may come loose after bolt removal. Ensure that the washers do not drop into the transmission case.

Discard the washers.


Drive Link Snubber Bolt (Coast Side) (Qty: 2)

Callout

Component Name

4

Drive Link Snubber (Coast Side)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID PUMP AND FLUID FILTER REMOVAL


image

Fig. 201: Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump And Fluid Filter Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Disconnect the fluid pump pass thru connector from the case.

1

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Bolt (Qty: 3)


2

NOTE:

Guide the fluid pump wiring harness from the case.


Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump


3

NOTE:

DISCARD

the seal.


Automatic Transmission Pump Fluid Outlet Seal

4

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Bolt

Callout

Component Name

5

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter


6

NOTE:

DISCARD

the seal.


Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Seal

MANUAL SHIFT DETENT LEVER WITH SHAFT POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY AND PARK PAWL ACTUATOR REMOVAL

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket Removal


image


Fig. 202: Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket Removal

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Remove the drive motor wiring harness connectors from the wiring harness connector brackets.

1

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Connector Bracket Bolt (Qty: 1)

2

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket

3

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Connector Bracket Bolt (Qty: 1)

4

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket

Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal

image


Fig. 203: Manual Shift Detent Lever With Shaft Position Switch Assembly And Park Pawl Actuator Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring

2

Park Pawl

3

Park Pawl Spring

4

Park Pawl Shaft

5

Park Pawl Actuator Guide Bolt

6

Park Pawl Actuator Guide

7

Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin


8

Manual Shift Shaft Pin


NOTE:

DISCARD

the manual

shift shaft pin.

9

Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft

10

Manual Shift Detent Lever

11

Park Pawl Actuator

DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL - 2ND POSITION

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Removal

image

Fig. 204: Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Bolt

2

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor


3

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Bolt (Qty: 2)


NOTE:

A plastic washer is used on the bolts during initial assembly.

These washers may come loose after bolt removal. Ensure that the washers do not drop into the transmission case.

Discard the

Callout

Component Name


washers.

4

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube


Drive Motor - 2nd Position Bolt Removal


image


Fig. 205: Drive Motor - 2nd Position Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor - 2nd Position Bolt Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 2)


2

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolt.


3

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolt.

4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

Drive Motor - 2nd Position Removal

image

Fig. 206: Drive Motor - 2nd Position

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 2nd Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 2nd Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 2nd Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor - 2nd Position Removal

Callout

Component Name


Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


Procedure

1. Install the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

2. Attach a lift assist hook through the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

3. Guide the drive motor resolver wire through the transmission case while lifting the drive motor using a lift assist.

4. Set the drive motor on its side on a clean lint free cloth. DO NOT rest the drive motor on the stator end coils.

5. Detach the lift assist hook and remove the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

6. Carefully tip over the drive motor flat onto the work surface resting on it cast aluminum support.


Special Tools

DT-51623 Motor Lift Bar

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Removal

image

Fig. 207: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Removal

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Bolt


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolt.


2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector


NOTE:

DISCARD

the

connector.

OUTPUT CARRIER AND OUTPUT CARRIER INTERNAL GEAR REMOVAL

image

Fig. 208: Output Carrier And Output Carrier Internal Gear Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Output Carrier

2

Output Carrier Thrust Bearing

3

Output Carrier Internal Gear

4

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub Thrust Bearing

DRIVE MOTOR REMOVAL - 1ST POSITION

Drive Motor - 1st Position Removal

image

Fig. 209: Drive Motor - 1st Position

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

2

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 4)


3

Drive Motor - 1st Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

2

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 4)


3

Drive Motor - 1st Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

2

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 4)


3

Drive Motor - 1st Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor - 1st Position Removal

Callout

Component Name


copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


Procedure

1. Install the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

2. Attach a lift assist hook through the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

3. Guide the drive motor resolver wire through the transmission case while lifting the drive motor using a lift assist.

4. Set the drive motor on its side on a clean lint free cloth. DO NOT rest the drive motor on the stator end coils.

5. Detach the lift assist hook and remove the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

6. Carefully tip over the drive motor flat onto the work surface resting on it cast aluminum support.


Special Tools

DT-51623 Motor Lift Bar

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Removal

image

Fig. 210: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Removal

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Bolt


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolt.


2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector


NOTE:

DISCARD

the

connector.

VARIABLE HIGH CLUTCH FLUID TRANSFER SUPPORT SEAL OVERHAUL

image

Fig. 211: Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

Refer to Seal Reuse Caution .


1

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal (Qty: 2)


CAUTION:

Size the fluid seal rings for at least 5 minutes after installation to obtain proper seal ring size.

Failure to do so may cause internal transmission leaks and transmission damage.

Callout

Component Name


Procedure

1. Use the DT-50911-2 pusher and adjustment screw from DT-50911-3 with DT-51700

installer to install the seals.

2. Adjust the turn screw on the protector and install the bottom seal ring first.

3. Use the large taper side of DT-51700 seal sizer for initial seal sizing, then flip the tool over for final sizing.

4. Leave DT-51700 seal sizer in place until the drive motor is ready to be installed.


NOTE:

Use NEW seals.


Special Tools

image DT-50911 Seal Installer

image DT-51700 Seal Installer


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


2

Variable High Clutch Fluid Transfer Support Seal - O-Ring


NOTE:

Use a NEW seal.


3

Variable High Clutch Fluid Seal Ring


NOTE:

Use a NEW seal.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEAL REMOVAL - LEFT SIDE

image


Fig. 212: Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Left Side Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

Special Tools

image DT-23129 Universal Seal Remover

image GE-6125-1B Slide Hammer


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

TRANSMISSION CASE CLEANING AND INSPECTION

Transmission Case Inspection (1 of 2)

image


Fig. 213: Transmission Case Inspection (1 Of 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Transmission Case Inspection (1 of 2)

Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

Do not use abrasive pads or bristle devices to clean the sealing surfaces. Abrasive pads produce a fine grit that can effect transmission function.

Abrasive pads can also remove enough metal to create oil leaks.

Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

image

After CAUTION: e

tDroannsomt irsesuisoen cloemanpionngents, aslololvwentotsa. ir dPre.vDioounsloyt usedcloth or spoalpveernttoswels imnaoyr derptoosit dserydiamneynt twrahnicshmmisasyion dcoampagoenethnets. Lcoinmt pfroonmentht.e towels can

Pcraeulismeinary Procedures

component

fail1u.rTeh. oroughly clean the transmission case assembly, including case threads, with clean solvent.

2. Clean gasket sealing surfaces. Remove all residual gasket material.

3. Inspect all threaded holes. If necessary, repair any thread damage.

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Pin

2

Transmission Case Locating Pin

3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Locating Pin

4

Driven Sprocket Bearing Mating Surface

5

Transmission Case to Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Sealing Surface

6

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Pin

7

Transmission Fluid Filler Cap


cleaning th

cleaning th

cleaning th

Transmission Case Inspection (2 of 2)

image


Fig. 214: Transmission Case Inspection (2 Of 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Transmission Case Inspection (2 of 2)

Callout

Component Name

1

Transmission Fluid Cooler Pipe Sealing Surface (Qty: 2)

2

Automatic Transmission Case Plug

3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Hole Plug

4

Transmission Fluid Drain Plug

5

Transmission Case to Control Valve Body Cover Sealing Surface

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION - LEFT SIDE

image


Fig. 215: Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Left Side Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

Special Tools

image DT-46629-A Axle Seal Installer

image GE-8092 Driver Handle


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

MANUAL SHIFT SHAFT SEAL REMOVAL

image

Fig. 216: Manual Shift Shaft Seal

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Manual Shift Shaft Seal

Special Tools

DT-45201 Seal Remover

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

VARIABLE LOW CLUTCH PLATE REMOVAL

image

Fig. 217: Variable Low Clutch Plate

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle

Callout

Component Name

operation, resulting in component damage.


Service the variable low clutch with the variable high clutch installed onto the drive motor rotor. This will prevent contact of the drive motor stator copper end coils with the work surface.


1

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Procedure

Use DT-47694 compressor and a suitable press to remove the retaining ring.


NOTE:

DISCARD

the retaining ring.


Special Tools

DT-47694 Piston Spring Compressor

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

2

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate

3

Variable Low Clutch Plate - Friction (Qty: 3)

4

Variable Low Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

5

Variable Low Clutch Spring


6

Variable Low Clutch Piston

Procedure

Use compressed air in the drive motor fluid feed passage to remove the piston.

VARIABLE HIGH CLUTCH REMOVAL

image


Fig. 218: Variable High Clutch

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.

1

Variable High Clutch Housing Bolt (Qty: 8)

2

Variable High Clutch Housing

3

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

4

Variable High Clutch Hub

5

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

DRIVE MOTOR DISASSEMBLE - 1ST POSITION

Drive Motor Stator and Rotor Removal


image


Fig. 219: Drive Motor Stator And Rotor Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Stator and Rotor Removal

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


NOTE:

DISCARD

the retaining

ring.


2

Drive Motor Rotor


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor is strongly magnetic. DO NOT

place within 6 inches of ferrous metallic components.

Callout

Component Name


NOTE:

Place the drive motor SrpoetociraloTnoaols

DliTn-t5f1r6e2e1 Rotor Remove/Installer

Fcolor tehqutiovalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


3

DprrievveeMnot tor Stator Bolt (Qty: 4)

image

metallic NOTE: from aDdIShCerAinRgDto

the obuotltesr.

diameter.


4

DMreivtealMlicotor Stator

image

debris can CAUTION:d

fDrOomNtOhTe mcoonttoarcot uotrer rdeiasmt tehteer by dbrloivtetinmgowtoitrh satdahtoesr iovne the tcaoppep.er end coils.

Damage to

the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


NOTE:

Place the drive motor stator on a lint free cloth over a piece of cardboard.


5

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.

6

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip

debris

debris

debris

be remove

be remove

be remove

Callout

Component Name


7

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.

8

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator


Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Assembly Removal


image

Fig. 220: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Assembly Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer (Qty: 3)

3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing (Qty: 3)

4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Guide Assembly

DRIVE MOTOR ASSEMBLE - 1ST POSITION

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Installation

image

Fig. 221: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing (Qty: 3)

3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer (Qty: 3)

4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

Drive Motor Stator and Rotor Installation

image


Fig. 222: Drive Motor Stator And Rotor Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Stator and Rotor Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator

Callout

Component Name


2

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


Procedure

Use Threadlocker Red on the bolt threads. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers.


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

5 N.m (44 lb in)

3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip


4

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 1)


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


Procedure

Use Threadlocker Red on the bolt threads. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers.

NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

5 N.m (44 lb in)


Callout

Component Name


5

Drive Motor Stator


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


6

Drive Motor Stator Bolt (Qty: 4)


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

11 N.m (97 lb in)


7

Drive Motor Rotor


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor bearing retaining ring groove will be visible when the drive

Callout

Component Name


motor rotor is completely installed. It may be necessary to jiggle the

DT-51621

installer to allow the rotor to fully drop into position.


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor is strongly magnetic. DO NOT

place within 6 inches of ferrous metallic components. Metallic debris can be removed from the motor outer diameter by blotting with adhesive tape.


Special Tools

DT-51621 Rotor Remove/Installer

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


8

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


NOTE:

Install a NEW

retaining ring.

VARIABLE HIGH CLUTCH DISASSEMBLE

Variable High Clutch Plate Removal


image


Fig. 223: Variable High Clutch Plate

Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

2

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate

3

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

4

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

5

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

2

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate

3

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

4

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

5

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

2

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate

3

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

4

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

5

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Variable High Clutch Plate Removal


Variable High Clutch Piston Removal

image


Fig. 224: Variable High Clutch Piston

Callout

Component Name


1

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Retaining Ring

Procedure

Use a press and DT-48903 compressor against the variable high clutch piston dam to remove the retaining ring.


NOTE:

DO NOT

exceed 5.0

mm (0.20 in) of travel below the snap ring groove when compressing the variable high clutch piston dam.

DISCARD

the retaining ring.

Callout

Component Name


1

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Retaining Ring

Procedure

Use a press and DT-48903 compressor against the variable high clutch piston dam to remove the retaining ring.


NOTE:

DO NOT

exceed 5.0

mm (0.20 in) of travel below the snap ring groove when compressing the variable high clutch piston dam.

DISCARD

the retaining ring.

Callout

Component Name


1

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Retaining Ring

Procedure

Use a press and DT-48903 compressor against the variable high clutch piston dam to remove the retaining ring.


NOTE:

DO NOT

exceed 5.0

mm (0.20 in) of travel below the snap ring groove when compressing the variable high clutch piston dam.

DISCARD

the retaining ring.

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Variable High Clutch Piston Removal


image


image

Callout

Component Name


Special Tools

DT-48903 Spring Compressor

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

2

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam

3

Variable High Clutch Piston Outer Seal

4

Variable High Clutch Piston Spring

5

Variable High Clutch Piston

6

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Outer Seal

7

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Inner Seal

8

Variable High Clutch Piston Inner Seal

VARIABLE HIGH CLUTCH ASSEMBLE

Variable High Clutch Piston Installation


image


Fig. 225: Variable High Clutch Piston

Callout

Component Name

Callout

Component Name

Callout

Component Name

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Variable High Clutch Piston Installation


Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

Refer to Seal

PRreeulimseinary Procedure Lubricate all seals with automatic transmission fluid (ATF) prior to installation.

Caution .


1

Variable High Clutch Piston Inner Seal


NOTE:

Use a NEW seal.


2

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Inner Seal


NOTE:

Use a NEW seal.


3

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Outer Seal


NOTE:

Use a NEW seal.


4

Variable High Clutch Piston

Special Tools

DT-48903 Spring Compressor

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

5

Variable High Clutch Piston Spring


6

Variable High Clutch Piston Outer Seal


NOTE:

Use a NEW seal.


7

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam

Special Tools

image DT-48903 Spring Compressor

image DT-51669 Protector


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


8

Variable High Clutch Piston Dam Retaining Ring


CAUTION:

Refer to Retaining Ring Reuse Caution .


Procedure

Callout

Component Name


Use a press and DT-48903 compressor against the variable high clutch piston dam to install the retaining ring.


NOTE:

DO NOT

exceed 5.0

mm (0.20 in) of travel below the snap ring groove when compressing the variable high clutch piston dam.


NOTE:

Use a NEW retaining ring.


Special Tools

DT-48903 Spring Compressor

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


Variable High Clutch Plate Installation

image


Fig. 226: Variable High Clutch Plate

Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

2

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

3

Variable High Clutch Plate - Friction (Qty: 3)

4

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate


5

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Procedure

Select the correct retaining ring. Refer to Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Measurement.

Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

2

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

3

Variable High Clutch Plate - Friction (Qty: 3)

4

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate


5

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Procedure

Select the correct retaining ring. Refer to Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Measurement.

Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Waved Plate

2

Variable High Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

3

Variable High Clutch Plate - Friction (Qty: 3)

4

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate


5

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Procedure

Select the correct retaining ring. Refer to Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Measurement.

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Variable High Clutch Plate Installation


VARIABLE HIGH CLUTCH BACKING PLATE RETAINING RING MEASUREMENT

image


Fig. 227: Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Measurement Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Assemble the variable high clutch. Refer to Variable High Clutch Assemble.


1

Variable High Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring

Procedure

1. Assemble the tools as shown and clamp the DT-50900 fixture to the bench.

2. Apply 20 pounds of pressure to the load gauge by turning the screw on the DT-50900

fixture clockwise.

3. Zero out the dial indicator.

4. Remove the pressure on the load gauge by turning the screw on the DT-50900 fixture one full turn counterclockwise.

5. Apply 50 PSI of compressed air and simultaneously adjust the screw on the DT-50900

fixture to apply 20 pounds of pressure to the load gauge.

6. Observe the dial indicator measurement. Refer to Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Specifications to determine the correct variable high clutch backing plate retaining ring.

Special Tools

image DT-50900 Clutch Travel Support Fixture

image DT-50903 Clutch Travel Load Gauge image DT-50905 Clutch Travel Air Adapter image DT-51627 Clutch Travel Air Adapter

Callout

Component Name


image GE-8001 Dial Indicator Set

image J-23327-1 Clutch Spring Compressor


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

VARIABLE HIGH CLUTCH INSTALLATION


image


Fig. 228: Variable High Clutch

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer

2

Variable High Clutch Hub

3

Variable High Clutch Hub Thrust Washer


4

Variable High Clutch Housing

Special Tools

DT-51628 Clutch Holder

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


5

Variable High Clutch Housing Bolt (Qty: 8)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .

Callout

Component Name


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

VARIABLE LOW CLUTCH PLATE INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 229: Variable Low Clutch Plate

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils

Callout

Component Name

may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.

Preliminary Procedure Service the variable low clutch with the variable high clutch installed onto the drive motor rotor. This will prevent contact of the drive motor stator copper end coils with the work surface.

1

Variable Low Clutch Piston

2

Variable Low Clutch Spring

3

Variable Low Clutch Plate (Qty: 3)

4

Variable Low Clutch Plate - Friction (Qty: 3)

5

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate


6

Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring - Selective

Procedure

1. Select the correct retaining ring. Refer to: Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Measurement.

2. Use DT-47694 compressor and a suitable press to install the retaining ring.


Special Tools

DT-47694 Piston Spring Compressor

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

VARIABLE LOW CLUTCH BACKING PLATE RETAINING RING MEASUREMENT

image

Fig. 230: Variable Low Clutch Backing Plate Retaining Ring Measurement Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

1. Assemble the variable low clutch. Refer to Variable Low Clutch Plate Installation.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


2. Service the variable low clutch with the variable high clutch installed onto the drive motor rotor. This will prevent contact of the drive motor stator copper end coils with the work surface.

DRIVE MOTOR INSTALLATION - 1ST POSITION

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Installation


image

Fig. 231: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector


NOTE:

Use a NEW connector.


2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Bolt

Procedure

Use Threadlocker Blue on the bolt threads. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers.


NOTE:

Install a NEW bolt.


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Drive Motor - 1st Position Installation

image

Fig. 232: Drive Motor - 1st Position

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 1st Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 1st Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 1st Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs). Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor - 1st Position Installation


Callout

Component Name


DO NOT

contact or rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


Procedure

1. Install the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

2. Install the DT-51624 alignment pins.

3. Carefully tip the drive motor onto its side, resting on the cast aluminum support. Never rest the drive motor on the stator copper end coils.

4. Attach a lift assist hook through the DT-51623 motor lift bar handle hole and carefully raise the drive motor while holding it to rotate into position for assembly.

5. Carefully lower the drive motor into the transmission case ensuring the copper end coils do not contact any metallic parts.


NOTE:

Ensure the seal sizer has been removed from the variable high clutch fluid transfer seals.


6. Use the DT-51624 alignment pins to guide the drive motor into position.

7. Guide the drive motor resolver wire through the transmission case while lowering the drive motor using a lift assist.

8. The drive motor should sit below the cast line in the transmission case when properly installed.

Special Tools

Callout

Component Name


image DT-51623 Motor Lift Bar

image DT-51624 Alignment Pins


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


2

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 4)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

26 N.m (19 lb ft)


3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

OUTPUT CARRIER INTERNAL GEAR OVERHAUL


image


Fig. 233: Output Carrier Internal Gear Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Output Carrier Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub

Callout

Component Name

3

Output Carrier Internal Gear

OUTPUT CARRIER AND OUTPUT CARRIER INTERNAL GEAR INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 234: Output Carrier And Output Carrier Internal Gear Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Output Carrier Internal Gear Hub Thrust Bearing

2

Output Carrier Internal Gear

3

Output Carrier Thrust Bearing

4

Output Carrier

DRIVE MOTOR DISASSEMBLE - 2ND POSITION

Drive Motor Rotor Removal

image


Fig. 235: Drive Motor Rotor

Callout

Component Name

1

Output Sun Gear Retaining Ring

2

Output Sun Gear


3

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


NOTE:

DISCARD

the retaining

ring.


4

Drive Motor Rotor


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor is strongly magnetic. DO NOT

place within 6 inches of ferrous metallic components.


NOTE:

Callout

Component Name

1

Output Sun Gear Retaining Ring

2

Output Sun Gear


3

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


NOTE:

DISCARD

the retaining

ring.


4

Drive Motor Rotor


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor is strongly magnetic. DO NOT

place within 6 inches of ferrous metallic components.


NOTE:

Callout

Component Name

1

Output Sun Gear Retaining Ring

2

Output Sun Gear


3

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


NOTE:

DISCARD

the retaining

ring.


4

Drive Motor Rotor


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor is strongly magnetic. DO NOT

place within 6 inches of ferrous metallic components.


NOTE:

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor Rotor Removal

Callout

Component Name


Place the drive motor rotor on a lint free cloth to prevent metallic debris from adhering to the outer diameter.

Metallic debris can be removed from the motor outer diameter by blotting with adhesive tape.


Special Tools

DT-51621 Rotor Remover/Installer

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


Drive Motor Stator Removal


image

Fig. 236: Drive Motor Stator

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor Stator Removal

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Stator Bolt (Qty: 4)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.


2

Drive Motor Stator


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


NOTE:

Place the drive motor stator on a lint free cloth over a piece of cardboard.


3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.

4

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip


5

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


NOTE:

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Stator Bolt (Qty: 4)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.


2

Drive Motor Stator


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


NOTE:

Place the drive motor stator on a lint free cloth over a piece of cardboard.


3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.

4

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip


5

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


NOTE:

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Stator Bolt (Qty: 4)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.


2

Drive Motor Stator


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


NOTE:

Place the drive motor stator on a lint free cloth over a piece of cardboard.


3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.

4

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip


5

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


NOTE:

Callout

Component Name


DISCARD

the bolts.

6

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator


7

Drive Motor Support


NOTE:

The drive motor support is a mandatory replacement component. Discard the drive motor support.


Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Removal


image

Fig. 237: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer (Qty: 3)

3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing (Qty: 3)

4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Guide Assembly

DRIVE MOTOR ASSEMBLE - 2ND POSITION

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Installation


image

Fig. 238: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing (Qty: 3)

3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer (Qty: 3)

4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

Drive Motor Stator Installation

image


Fig. 239: Drive Motor Stator

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Support


NOTE:

The drive motor support is a mandatory replacement component. Install a NEW drive motor support.

2

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator


3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Support


NOTE:

The drive motor support is a mandatory replacement component. Install a NEW drive motor support.

2

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator


3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Support


NOTE:

The drive motor support is a mandatory replacement component. Install a NEW drive motor support.

2

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator


3

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 3)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor Stator Installation


Callout

Component Name


Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


Procedure

Use Threadlocker Red on the bolt threads. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers.


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

5 N.m (44 lb in)

4

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip


5

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt (Qty: 1)


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

5 N.m (44 lb in)


6

Drive Motor Stator


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or

rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils

Callout

Component Name


may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


7

Drive Motor Stator Bolt (Qty: 4)


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

11 N.m (97 lb in)


Drive Motor Rotor Installation


image

Fig. 240: Drive Motor Rotor

Callout

Component Name

Callout

Component Name

Callout

Component Name

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor Rotor Installation


Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Rotor


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor bearing retaining ring groove will be visible when the drive motor rotor is completely installed. It may be necessary to jiggle the

DT-51621

installer to allow the rotor to fully drop into position.


NOTE:

The drive motor rotor is strongly magnetic. DO NOT

place within 6 inches of ferrous metallic components. Metallic debris can be removed from the motor outer diameter by blotting with adhesive tape.


Special Tools

DT-51621 Rotor Remover/Installer

Callout

Component Name


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


2

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring


NOTE:

Install a NEW

retaining ring.

3

Output Sun Gear

4

Output Sun Gear Retaining Ring

DRIVE MOTOR INSTALLATION - 2ND POSITION

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Installation


image

Fig. 241: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector


NOTE:

Use a NEW connector.

Callout

Component Name


2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector Bolt (Qty: 1)

Procedure

Use Threadlocker Blue on the bolt threads. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers.


NOTE:

Install a NEW bolt.


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)


Drive Motor - 2nd Position Installation


image

Fig. 242: Drive Motor - 2nd Position

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 2nd Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs).

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 2nd Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs).

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor - 2nd Position


WARNING:

The generator motor weighs approximately 23 kg (50 lbs).

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Drive Motor - 2nd Position Installation

Callout

Component Name


Personal injury may result if you lift the generator motor improperly.


CAUTION:

DO NOT

contact or rest the drive motor stator on the copper end coils.

Damage to the copper end coils may cause a high voltage short during vehicle operation, resulting in component damage.


Procedure

1. Install the DT-51623 motor lift bar.

2. Carefully tip the drive motor onto its side, resting on the cast aluminum support. Never rest the drive motor on the stator copper end coils.

3. Attach a lift assist hook through the DT-51623 motor lift bar handle hole and carefully raise the drive motor while holding it to rotate into position for assembly.

4. Carefully lower the drive motor into the transmission case ensuring the copper end coils do not contact any metallic parts.

5. Guide the drive motor resolver wire through the transmission case while lowering the drive motor using a lift assist.

6. If the drive motor will not fully seat, raise the drive motor up with the lift assist so that the planetary gear set can be rotated slightly to engage the sun gear on the drive motor.

7. Repeat step 5 until the drive motor can be fully seated. DO NOT rock, shake, or hammer the drive motor to seat it.


Special Tools

DT-51623 Motor Lift Bar

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

Drive Motor - 2nd Position Bolt Installation


image


Fig. 243: Drive Motor - 2nd Position Bolts Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor - 2nd Position Bolt Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

38 N.m (28 lb ft)


2

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 1)


NOTE:

Use NEW bolts.


Tighten

38 N.m (28 lb ft)


3

Automatic Transmission Case Extension Bolt (Qty: 2)

Tighten

38 N.m (28 lb ft)

Callout

Component Name


4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt (Qty: 3)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)


Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Installation


image

Fig. 244: Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube


2

Drive Motor Stator Cooling Tube Bolt (Qty: 2)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

3

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor


4

Automatic Transmission Output Speed Sensor Bolt

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

MANUAL SHIFT DETENT LEVER WITH SHAFT POSITION SWITCH ASSEMBLY AND PARK PAWL ACTUATOR INSTALLATION

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket Installation

image


Fig. 245: Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket


2

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Connector Bracket Bolt (Qty: 1)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

3

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Bracket


4

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Connector Bracket Bolt (Qty: 1)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Installation

image


Fig. 246: Manual Shift Detent Lever With Shaft Position Switch Assembly And Park Pawl Actuator Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Manual Shift Detent Lever with Shaft Position Switch Assembly and Park Pawl Actuator Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Park Pawl Actuator

2

Manual Shift Detent Lever

3

Manual Shift Detent Lever Shaft


4

Manual Shift Shaft Pin


CAUTION:

The manual shift shaft pin must be installed before the manual shift detent lever pin. Use the special tool, DT-51436, to

install the manual shift shaft pin to the proper depth.

Failure to follow these steps may result in damage to

Callout

Component Name


the transmission.


Procedure

Install the manual shift shaft pin before installing the manual shift detent lever pin.

Special Tools

DT-51436 Manual Shaft Pin Installer

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

5

Manual Shift Detent Lever Pin

6

Park Pawl Actuator Guide


7

Park Pawl Actuator Guide Bolt

Tighten

14 N.m (124 lb in)

8

Park Pawl Shaft

9

Park Pawl Spring

10

Park Pawl


11

Manual Shift Detent Lever Spring

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

MANUAL SHIFT SHAFT SEAL INSTALLATION


image


Fig. 247: Manual Shift Shaft Seal

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Callout

Component Name


1

Manual Shift Shaft Seal

Special Tools

DT-51672 Seal Installer

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID PUMP AND FLUID FILTER INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 248: Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump And Fluid Filter Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Seal

2

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter


3

Automatic Transmission Fluid Filter Bolt


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

4

Automatic Transmission Pump Fluid Outlet Seal


5

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump

Procedure

Connect the fluid pump pass thru connector to the case.

Callout

Component Name


6

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump Bolt (Qty: 3)

Tighten

22 N.m (16 lb ft)

DRIVE LINK SNUBBER INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 249: Drive Link Snubber

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Link Snubber - Coast Side


2

Drive Link Snubber Bolt (Qty: 2)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

3

Drive Link Snubber - Drive Side


4

Drive Link Snubber Bolt (Qty: 2)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER BAFFLE INSTALLATION

image

Fig. 250: Front Differential Carrier Baffle Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Fluid Chip Collector Magnet

2

Front Differential Carrier Baffle


3

Front Differential Carrier Baffle Bolt (Qty: 2)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

DRIVE SPROCKET, DRIVEN SPROCKET, AND DRIVE LINK INSTALLATION

image

Fig. 251: Drive Sprocket, Driven Sprocket And Drive Link Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Driven Sprocket Bearing

2

Drive Sprocket, Driven Sprocket, and Drive Link

INPUT SUN GEAR SHAFT INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 252: Input Sun Gear Shaft

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Variable High Clutch Housing Seal

2

Input Sun Gear Shaft

3

Input Sun Gear

4

Input Sun Gear Retaining Ring

5

Input Sun Gear Shaft Assembly

6

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 253: Front Differential Carrier

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Differential Carrier Sun Gear Thrust Bearing

2

Front Differential Carrier Sun Gear

3

Front Differential Carrier

4

Front Differential Carrier Bearing

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE DAMPENER AND DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING DISASSEMBLE

Front Differential Ring Gear Removal

image


Fig. 254: Front Differential Ring Gear Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Front Differential Ring Gear Removal

Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Use wooden blocks or equivalent to elevate the torque dampener and differential housing on the bench to protect the front wheel drive shaft oil seal.

1

Front Differential Ring Gear Retainer

2

Front Differential Ring Gear

3

Front Differential Carrier Internal Gear Wear Ring

Input Brake Clutch Removal

image


Fig. 255: Input Brake Clutch

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

2

Input Brake Clutch

3

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

2

Input Brake Clutch

3

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

2

Input Brake Clutch

3

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Brake Clutch Removal


Input Internal Gear Removal

image


Fig. 256: Input Internal Gear

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Input Internal Gear

3

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Input Internal Gear

3

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Input Internal Gear

3

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Internal Gear Removal


Input Drive Flange Removal

image


Fig. 257: Input Drive Flange

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt (Qty: 6)

Procedure

Use DT-51654 holder in a vise to hold the torque dampener while removing the bolts.


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.


Special Tools

DT-51654 Dampener Holder

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

2

Input Drive Flange

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt (Qty: 6)

Procedure

Use DT-51654 holder in a vise to hold the torque dampener while removing the bolts.


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.


Special Tools

DT-51654 Dampener Holder

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

2

Input Drive Flange

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt (Qty: 6)

Procedure

Use DT-51654 holder in a vise to hold the torque dampener while removing the bolts.


NOTE:

DISCARD

the bolts.


Special Tools

DT-51654 Dampener Holder

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

2

Input Drive Flange

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Drive Flange Removal


Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Removal

image


Fig. 258: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Removal

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Bearing


NOTE:

The thrust bearing may be stuck to the torque dampener.

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Removal

image


Fig. 259: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Removal

Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

Refer to Seal Reuse Caution .

1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Return Spring Retaining Ring

2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Return Spring

3

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Apply Bearing


4

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston


NOTE:

It may be necessary to apply air to the apply passage to remove the piston.


5

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Outer Seal


NOTE:

DISCARD

the seal.

Callout

Component Name


6

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Inner Seal


NOTE:

DISCARD

the seal.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEAL REMOVAL - RIGHT SIDE


image


Fig. 260: Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Right Side Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

Special Tools

image DT-23129 Universal Seal Remover

image GE-6125-1B Slide Hammer


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

INPUT SHAFT SEAL REMOVAL

image


Fig. 261: Input Shaft Seal

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Input Shaft Seal

Special Tools

image DT-23129 Universal Seal Remover

image GE-6125-1B Slide Hammer


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

INPUT SHAFT BEARING REMOVAL

image


Fig. 262: Input Shaft Bearing

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Input Shaft Bearing

Procedure

Use a punch and hammer to remove the bearing.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE DAMPENER AND DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING CLEANING AND INSPECTION

image


Fig. 263: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener And Differential Housing Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

Do not use abrasive pads or bristle devices to clean the sealing surfaces. Abrasive pads produce a fine grit that can effect transmission function.

Abrasive pads can also remove enough metal to create oil leaks.

Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

image

After CAUTION: e

tDroannsomt irsesuisoen cloemanpionngents, aslololvwentotsa. ir dPre.vDioounsloyt usedcloth or spoalpveernttoswels imnaoyr derptoosit dserydiamneynt twrahnicshmmisasyion dcoampagoenethnets. Lcoinmt pfroonmentht.e towels can

Pcraeulismeinary Procedures

component

fail1u.rTeh. oroughly clean the torque dampener and differential housing, including case threads, with clean solvent.

2. Clean gasket sealing surfaces. Remove all residual gasket material.

3. Inspect all threaded holes. If necessary, repair any thread damage.

1

Transmission Fluid Filler Tube Plug

2

Transmission Fluid Filler Tube Plug

3

Transmission Case to Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Sealing Surface

4

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pressure Test Hole Plug (Qty: 2)

5

Retaining Ring Grooves

cleaning th

cleaning th

cleaning th

INPUT SHAFT BEARING INSTALLATION

image


Fig. 264: Input Shaft Bearing

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Input Shaft Bearing

Procedure

Use DT-48008 support with the small shoulder facing up to support the housing while using

DT-51625-1 installer and a press to install the bearing.

Special Tools

image DT-48008 Press Support/Pinion Bearing Installer

image DT-51625-1 Bearing Installer


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

INPUT SHAFT SEAL INSTALLATION

image


Fig. 265: Input Shaft Seal

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Input Shaft Seal

Special Tools

image DT-8092 Drive Handle

image DT-51622 Seal Installer


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

FRONT WHEEL DRIVE SHAFT OIL SEAL INSTALLATION - RIGHT SIDE

image

Fig. 266: Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal - Right Side Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Front Wheel Drive Shaft Oil Seal

Special Tools

image DT-46629-A Axle Seal Installer

image GE-8092 Driver Handle


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

INPUT INTERNAL GEAR ASSEMBLY OVERHAUL

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch

image


Fig. 267: Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Backing Plate Ring

2

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Backing Plate

3

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Spring

4

Automatic Transmission Torque Limit Clutch Backing Plate

Input Internal Gear Hub

image


Fig. 268: Input Internal Gear Hub

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Input Internal Gear Hub

3

Input Internal Gear

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Input Internal Gear Hub

3

Input Internal Gear

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

2

Input Internal Gear Hub

3

Input Internal Gear

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Internal Gear Hub


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE DAMPENER AND DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING ASSEMBLE

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Installation

image


Fig. 269: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Installation

Callout

Component Name

CAUTION:

Refer to Seal Reuse Caution .


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Inner Seal


NOTE:

Install a NEW seal.


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Outer Seal


NOTE:

Install a NEW seal.


3

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston

Procedure

Align the dot on the piston to the 6 o'clock notch on the dampener and differential housing.


NOTE:

Lubricate the piston seals with

Callout

Component Name


automatic transmission fluid (ATF) to aid in installation of the piston.

4

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Apply Bearing

5

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Return Spring

6

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bypass Clutch Piston Return Spring Retaining Ring


Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Installation


image


Fig. 270: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Bearing

2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener

Input Drive Flange Installation

image


Fig. 271: Input Drive Flange

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Drive Flange


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt (Qty: 6)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


Procedure


NOTE:

Install NEW bolts.

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Drive Flange


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt (Qty: 6)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


Procedure


NOTE:

Install NEW bolts.

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Drive Flange


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Bolt (Qty: 6)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


CAUTION:

Refer to Torque-to- Yield Fastener Caution .


Procedure


NOTE:

Install NEW bolts.

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Drive Flange Installation

Callout

Component Name


Use DT-51654 holder in a vise to hold the torque dampener while installing the bolts.

Tighten

58 N.m (35 lb ft) +37.5 Degrees

Special Tools

image DT-51654 Dampener Holder

image EN-45059 Angle Meter


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


Input Internal Gear Installation


image


Fig. 272: Input Internal Gear

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer - Selective

Procedure

Select the correct thrust washer. Refer to: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement.

2

Input Internal Gear

3

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer - Selective

Procedure

Select the correct thrust washer. Refer to: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement.

2

Input Internal Gear

3

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer - Selective

Procedure

Select the correct thrust washer. Refer to: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement.

2

Input Internal Gear

3

Input Internal Gear Retaining Ring

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Internal Gear Installation


Input Brake Clutch Installation

image


Fig. 273: Input Brake Clutch

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring


2

Input Brake Clutch


NOTE:

The input brake clutch should rotate freely in one direction and lock in the opposite direction.

Rotate the clutch assembly and listen/feel for the ratchet of the clutch in it's designed rotational direction.

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring


2

Input Brake Clutch


NOTE:

The input brake clutch should rotate freely in one direction and lock in the opposite direction.

Rotate the clutch assembly and listen/feel for the ratchet of the clutch in it's designed rotational direction.

Callout

Component Name

1

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring


2

Input Brake Clutch


NOTE:

The input brake clutch should rotate freely in one direction and lock in the opposite direction.

Rotate the clutch assembly and listen/feel for the ratchet of the clutch in it's designed rotational direction.

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY Input Brake Clutch Installation

Callout

Component Name

3

Input Brake Clutch Retaining Ring


Front Differential Ring Gear Installation


image


Fig. 274: Front Differential Ring Gear Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Front Differential Ring Gear Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Front Differential Carrier Internal Gear Wear Ring


NOTE:

Inspect the dampener housing for wear before installing the wear ring. If excessive wear is found, replace the dampener housing.

2

Front Differential Ring Gear


3

Front Differential Ring Gear Retainer

Callout

Component Name


NOTE:

Stake the

AUTOMATICreTtaRiAneNrStMo ISSION TORQUE DAMPENER THRUST WASHER MEASUREMENT

ensure it is

retaining ring groove.

retaining ring groove.

retaining ring groove.

Automatic Transsmeaistseiodn iTnortqhuee Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement (Step 1)


image


Fig. 275: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement (Step 1) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement (Step 1)

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Case Mating Surface

Procedure

1. Using 2 inch gauge blocks and at least a 16 inch straight edge, set up the measurement as shown.

2. Measure from the case mating surface to the top of the straight edge and record the measurement.

3. Measure from the top of the input internal gear thrust bearing to the top of the straight edge and subtract this dimension from the measurement taken in step 2. Record the measurement

4. Measure the thickness of the torque dampener and differential housing gasket and subtract from the measurement recorded in step 3. Record this as dimension A.

2

Input Internal Gear Thrust Bearing

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement (Step 2)


image


Fig. 276: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement (Step 2) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Measurement (Step 2)

Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener

Procedure

1. Apply 50 PSI of compressed air to the torque dampener bypass clutch and measure from the torque dampener and differential housing mating face to the torque dampener. Record this as dimension B.

2. Subtract dimension A from dimension B to determine the correct automatic transmission torque dampener thrust washer. Refer to Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener Thrust Washer Specifications.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION TORQUE DAMPENER AND DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING INSTALLATION

image

Fig. 277: Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener And Differential Housing With Bolt Tightening Sequences

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing Gasket


NOTE:

Install a NEW gasket.


2

Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener and Differential Housing


NOTE:

Use care not to crush the front differential carrier baffle, this may prevent the torque dampener and differential housing from seating properly.

Callout

Component Name


3

Torque Converter and Differential Housing Bolt (Qty: 16)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

32 N.m (24 lb ft)

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY DISASSEMBLE


image


Fig. 278: Control Valve Assembly

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Retainer

2

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLE

image


Fig. 279: Control Valve Assembly

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

2

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Retainer

CONTROL VALVE ASSEMBLY AND TRANSMISSION WIRING HARNESS INSTALLATION

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Installation

image

Fig. 280: Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal

2

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch

3

Automatic Transmission Wiring Connector Seal

4

Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve

Control Valve (with Body and Valve) Installation

image

Fig. 281: Control Valve (With Body And Valve) With Bolt Tightening Sequence Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Control Valve (with Body and Valve) Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Variable Low Clutch Fluid Passage Seal


NOTE:

Install a NEW seal.


2

Control Valve Lower Body Spacer Plate


NOTE:

Install a NEW spacer plate.

3

Control Valve Body Spacer Plate Retainer (Qty: 2)


4

Control Valve (with Body and Valve)

Procedure

Connect the transmission wiring harness to the control valve body.


5

CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Control Valve Body Bolt (Qty: 13)Tighten 9 N.m (80 lb in)

6

Fluid Transfer Pipe

Callout

Component Name


7

Fluid Transfer Pipe Bolt

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)


Control Solenoid Valve Installation


image

Fig. 282: Control Solenoid Valve (With Bolt Tightening Sequence) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Control Solenoid Valve Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Control Solenoid Valve Filter Plate

Procedure

Align and engage the alignment tabs on the control solenoid valve filter plate to the control solenoid valve.


NOTE:

The filter plate is reusable, inspect the filter plate and replace if damaged.


2

Control Solenoid Valve

Procedure

Connect the control solenoid valve wiring harness.

Callout

Component Name


3

Control Valve Body Bolt (Qty: 4)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

CONTROL VALVE BODY COVER INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 283: Control Valve Body Cover (With Bolt Tightening Sequence) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal - O-ring


NOTE:

The seal is reusable, inspect the seal and replace if damaged.


2

Automatic Transmission Fluid Level Control Valve Seal


NOTE:

The gasket is reusable, inspect the gasket and replace if damaged.

3

Control Valve Body Cover

Callout

Component Name


4

Control Valve Body Cover Bolt (Qty: 16)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

DRIVE MOTOR POWER INVERTER MODULE INSTALLATION


image

Fig. 284: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module (With Bolt Tightening Sequence) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

Preliminary Procedure

Ensure the drive motor power inverter module cavity is free of debris and coolant before installation.


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal

Procedure

Ensure proper operation of the seal after installation of the drive motor power inverter module. Refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Fluid Seal Pressure Test.


NOTE:

Install a NEW seal.

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module

Callout

Component Name


3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Bolt (Qty: 7)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .


Procedure

Use threadlocker blue on the bolt threads. Refer to Adhesives, Fluids, Lubricants, and Sealers. Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)


4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Buss Bar Bolt (Qty: 6)

Procedure

1. Connect the 3 drive motor power inverter module connectors after the drive motor power inverter module is installed.

2. Ensure the wiring harness is routed properly and the wires are in the plastic conduit to prevent cut or chaffed wires.


Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

DRIVE MOTOR POWER INVERTER MODULE COVER INSTALLATION

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Installation


image

Fig. 285: Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover (With Bolt Tightening Sequence) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Installation

Callout

Component Name


1

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Electrical Connector Seal


NOTE:

The seal is reusable, inspect the seal and replace if damaged.

2

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Vent

3

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Gasket


4

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover

Procedure

Use the DT-51626 protector when installing the cover to avoid damaging the connector seal.


NOTE:

Ensure the drive motor power inverter module cover alignment pins are clean and free of debris to allow the cover to seat flush to the case sealing surface.


Special Tools

DT-51626 Seal Protector

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.


5

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cover Bolt (Qty: 17)


CAUTION:

Refer to Fastener Caution .

Callout

Component Name



Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)


Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Installation


image

Fig. 286: Drive Motor Battery Positive And Negative Cable Connector (With Bolt Tightening Sequence) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Installation

Callout

Component Name

1

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector


2

Drive Motor Battery Positive and Negative Cable Connector Bolt (Qty: 4)

Tighten

9 N.m (80 lb in)

FRONT DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER FINAL ROTATIONAL TORQUE MEASUREMENT

image

Fig. 287: Front Differential Carrier Final Rotational Torque Measurement Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Front Differential Carrier Procedure

Use a dial or beam torque wrench with DT-49938 Differential Rotating Tool to measure turning torque.

The rotational torque should be below 7.45 N.m (65.94 lb in)

Special Tools

DT-49938 Differential Rotating Tool

For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

HOLDING FIXTURE REMOVAL

image


Fig. 288: Holding Fixture Assembly

Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name


1

Â


WARNING:

Handle with care, the transmission assembly weighs over 183 Kg (403

lbs). Bodily injury could occur if not handled properly.


Procedure

1. Install DT-46625 Holding Fixture.

2. Remove lock pin from DT-3289-20 Holding Fixture.

3. Raise the transmission with an overhead hoist in order to remove the holding DT-46625

Transmission Holding Fixture.

4. Lower the transmission assembly onto the transmission jack.

Special Tools

Callout

Component Name


image DT-03289-20 Holding Fixture Base Assembly

image DT-46625 Holding Fixture

image DT-46625-20 Holding Fixture Adapters


For equivalent regional tools, refer to Special Tools.

DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Throttle Positions


Engine Braking

A condition where the engine is used to slow the vehicle by manually downshifting during a zero throttle coastdown.

Full Throttle Downshift

A quick apply of the accelerator pedal to its full travel, forcing a downshift.

Heavy Throttle

Approximately 3/4 of accelerator pedal travel, 75 percent throttle position.

Light Throttle

Approximately 1/4 of accelerator pedal travel, 25 percent throttle position.

Medium Throttle

Approximately 1/2 of accelerator pedal travel, 50 percent throttle position.

Minimum Throttle

The least amount of throttle opening required for an upshift.

Wide Open Throttle (WOT)

Full travel of the accelerator pedal, 100 percent throttle position.

Zero Throttle Coastdown

A full release of the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion and in drive range.

Shift Condition Definitions


Bump

A sudden and forceful apply of a clutch or a band.

Chuggle

A bucking or jerking. This condition may be most noticeable when the converter clutch is engaged. It is similar to the feel of towing a trailer.

Delayed

A condition where a shift is expected but does not occur for a period of time. This could be described as a clutch or band engagement that does not occur as quickly as expected during a part throttle or wide open throttle apply of the accelerator, or during manual downshifting to a lower range. This term is also defined as LATE or EXTENDED.

Double Bump - Double Feel

Two sudden and forceful applies of a clutch or a band.

Early

A condition where the shift occurs before the car has reached proper speed. This condition tends to labor the engine after the upshift.

End Bump

A firmer feel at the end of a shift than at the start of the shift. This is also defined as END FEEL or SLIP BUMP.

Firm

A noticeably quick apply of a clutch or band that is considered normal with a medium to heavy throttle. This apply should not be confused with HARSH or ROUGH.

Flare

A quick increase in engine RPM along with a momentary loss of torque. This most generally occurs during a shift. This condition is also defined as SLIPPING.

Harsh - Rough

A more noticeable apply of a clutch or band than FIRM. This condition is considered undesirable at any throttle position.

Hunting

A repeating quick series of upshifts and downshifts that causes a noticeable change in engine RPM, such as a 4

- 3 - 4 shift pattern. This condition is also defined as BUSYNESS.

Initial Feel

A distinctly firmer feel at the start of a shift than at the finish of the shift.

Late

A shift that occurs when the engine RPM is higher than normal for a given amount of throttle.

Shudder

A repeating jerking condition similar to CHUGGLE but more severe and rapid. This condition may be most noticeable during certain ranges of vehicle speed.

Slipping

A noticeable increase in engine RPM without a vehicle speed increase. A slip usually occurs during or after initial clutch or band apply.

Soft

A slow, almost unnoticeable clutch or band apply with very little shift feel.

Surge

A repeating engine related condition of acceleration and deceleration that is less intense than CHUGGLE.

Tie-Up

A condition where two opposing clutch and/or bands are attempting to apply at the same time causing the engine to labor with a noticeable loss of engine RPM.

Noise Conditions


Drive Link Noise

A whine or growl that increases or fades with vehicle speed, and is most noticeable under a light throttle acceleration. It may also be noticeable in PARK or NEUTRAL operating ranges with the vehicle stationary.

Final Drive Noise

A hum related to vehicle speed which is most noticeable under a light throttle acceleration.

Planetary Gear Noise

A whine related to vehicle speed, which is most noticeable in FIRST gear, SECOND gear, FOURTH gear or REVERSE. The condition may become less noticeable, or go away, after an upshift.

Pump Noise

A high pitched whine that increases in intensity with engine RPM. This condition may also be noticeable in all operating ranges with the vehicle stationary or moving.

Driver Shift Control


Driver shift control (DSC) allows the driver to change gears similar to a manual transmission. Refer to the vehicle owner's manual for specific DSC operating instructions.

Transmission Abbreviations


A/C

Air Conditioning

AC

Alternating Current

AT

Automatic Transmission

CCDIC

Climate Control Driver Information Center

DC

Direct Current

DIC

Driver Information Center

DLC

Data Link Connector

DMM

Digital Multimeter

DSC

Driver Shift Control

DTC

Diagnostic Trouble Code

EBTCM

Electronic Brake/Traction Control Module

ECCC

Electronically-Controlled Capacity Clutch

ECT

Engine Coolant Temperature

EMI

Electromagnetic Interference

IAT

Intake Air Temperature

IGN

Ignition

IMS

Internal Mode Switch

MAP

Manifold Absolute Pressure

MIL

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

NC

Normally Closed

NO

Normally Open

OBD

On Board Diagnostic

OSS

Output Speed Sensor

PC

Pressure Control

PCM

Powertrain Control Module

PCS

Pressure Control Solenoid

PS

Pressure Switch

PWM

Pulse Width Modulation

RPM

Revolutions Per Minute

SS

Shift Solenoid

TAP

Transmission Adaptive Pressure

TFP

Transmission Fluid Pressure

TFT

Transmission Fluid Temperature

TP

Throttle Position

VSS

Vehicle Speed Sensor

WOT

Wide Open Throttle

TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION

image

Fig. 289: Transmission Identification Information Plate Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Line ID

2

Shift ID

3

Build Year

4

Julian Date

5

Broadcast Code

6

Reserved Use

7

Sequence Number

8

Machine Readable Matrix

9

Broadcast Code

10

GM Part Number

11

Transmission Unique Number (TUN)

TRANSMISSION GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The 5ET50 is a fully automatic, front wheel drive transaxle containing an electronically-controlled continuously-

variable electric transmission. It includes an input flange, a torque dampener assembly with a rotating friction clutch, a stationary mechanical (one way) clutch, one stationary and one rotating friction clutch assemblies, a hydraulic pressurization and control system, a power inverter (and control) module, an electric fluid pump, two planetary gear sets, and two electric drive motor-generators. Drive motor-generator A (1) is 48 kW and drive motor-generator B (2) is 87 kW.

The torque damper is internal to the transmission, bolted to the input flange, and contains coil springs and a damper bypass clutch. The torque damper acts as a spring coupling to smoothly transmit shaft power from the engine to the input planetary gear set in the transmission and as a direct mechanical coupling from the transmission to the engine using the damper bypass clutch during engine starting and engine stopping.

The power inverter module is under the angled top cover and includes a control circuit board, solid-state switches, capacitors, and other electronic components. The power inverter module receives and monitors driver commands and various other electronic sensor inputs and uses this information to vary the torque and speed of each electric motor- generator and to command the engine controller and engine operation. The power inverter module is connected with each of the two drive motor-generators through three internal terminal posts for transmitting variable-frequency,

high-voltage, three-phase alternating-current (AC) electricity. The power inverter module is also electrically connected with the battery pack through a high-voltage, high-power connector and cable assembly for transmitting direct-current (DC) electricity.

The hydraulic system includes a high pressure electric fluid pump driven by an electric motor supplied with high- voltage current from the power inverter module, shift solenoid valves, a variable line pressure control solenoid valve, and control wiring harness. All of the shift solenoids and the transmission fluid temperature sensor are packaged into a self-contained control solenoid valve assembly under the front cover. The electric pump maintains working pressure and control of the clutches when the engine is on and when the engine is off.

The two planetary gear sets, electric motor-generators, and other clutches together provide all-electric propulsion, continuously-variable hybrid transmission ratios, and a single fixed mechanical transmission ratio. When the vehicle is operating all-electrically, the stationary mechanical clutch reacts torque from motor-generator A to the output in the forward direction and the stationary friction clutch assembly can react torque from motor-generator B to the output. When the engine is in use, the stationary and rotating friction clutch assemblies are controlled by the power inverter module using hydraulic shift solenoids to select from a variable lower range of hybrid transmission ratios, a fixed mechanical transmission ratio, and a variable higher range of hybrid transmission ratios.

The transmission may be operated in any of the following gear ranges:

P (PARK)

This position locks the wheels and prevents the vehicle from rolling either forward or backward. PARK is the best position to use when starting the vehicle. Because the transmission utilizes a shift lock control system, it is necessary to fully depress the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK. For safety reasons, use the parking brake in addition to the PARK position.

R (REVERSE)

This position allows the vehicle to be operated in a rearward direction. There is no separate reverse clutch or gearing in the transmission. All of the torque for reverse comes from motor-generator B.

N (NEUTRAL)

In this position, the propulsion system does not provide power to the wheels.

D (DRIVE)

Drive range should be used for all normal driving conditions for maximum efficiency and fuel economy. Drive position allows the transmission to operate all-electrically using one or both motor-generators when sufficient battery power and energy are available or using the engine when the battery is not sufficient.

L (Low)

This position is used for the "feel" of engine braking and can be used for the slowing of the vehicle once the throttle is lifted. While in the position the vehicle will slow quicker and use the drive motor generator B to more aggressively collect energy during a regenerative braking event.

TRANSMISSION COMPONENT AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The mechanical components of the hybrid 5ET50 Transmission are as follows: image Input Brake Clutch (MKV Only)

image Input Drive Flange

image Input Sun Gear Shaft image Input Carrier

image Input Internal Gear

image Drive Motor (1) and (2)

image Driven and Drive Sprocket with Drive Link Assembly image Output Carrier Internal Gear

image Variable Low Clutch Assembly image Variable High Clutch Assembly image Control Valve Body Assembly

image Automatic Transmission Torque Dampener image Front Differential Carrier

The electrical components of the 5ET50 are as follows:

image Drive Motor (1)

image Drive Motor (2)

image Fluid Pump Motor

image Output Speed Sensor

image Manual Shift Detent Lever

image Drive Motor Generator Power Inverter Module image Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Connector

For more information, refer to Electronic Component Description. HYBRID TRANSMISSION MODES OF OPERATION

Single Motor Electric Vehicle (EV)

Single motor EV operation is used when lower torque is required. This includes reverse gear. The Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) and drive motor A (1) are OFF. The high range clutch is open and the low range

clutch is closed. Drive motor B (2) provides torque through the planetary gear set to the wheels.

Dual Motor Electric Vehicle (EV)

Dual motor EV operation is used when high torque is required at any vehicle speed. The Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) is OFF. Drive motor A (1) and drive motor B (2) are ON. The high range clutch (C2) is open and the low range clutch (C1) is closed. Drive motors A (1) and B (2) both provide torque through the planetary gear sets to the wheels.

Extended Range Low

Extended range low is used when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) requires charging at lower vehicle speeds. The Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) is ON. Drive motor A (1) and drive motor B (2) are ON. The low range clutch (C1) is closed, and the high range clutch (C2) is open. Drive motor A (1) is generating to charge the RESS. Drive motor B (2) provides torque through the planetary gear set to the wheels.

Extended Range Fixed Ratio

Extended range fixed ratio is used when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) requires charging at mid-range vehicle speeds. The Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) is ON. The ICE provides power through the planetary gear set to the wheels. Drive motor A (1) and drive motor B (2) are ON. The low range clutch (C1) is closed, and the high range clutch (C2) is closed. Drive motor B (2) can perform regeneration to charge the RESS in low torque demands or provide torque through the planetary gear set to the wheels in high torque demands.

Extended Range High

Extended range high is used when the rechargeable energy storage system (RESS) requires charging at higher vehicle speeds. The Internal Combustion Engine (ICE) is ON. The ICE provides power through the planetary gear set to the wheels. Drive motor A (1) and drive motor B (2) are ON. The low range clutch (C1) is open and the high range clutch (C2) is closed. Both drive motor A (1) and drive motor B (2) can either operate in regeneration mode to charge the RESS or provide power to the wheels.

TRANSMISSION INDICATORS AND MESSAGES

No transmission-related indicators or messages are displayed on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). For a complete listing and description of all vehicle indicators and messages, refer to Indicator/Warning Message Description and Operation.

ELECTRONIC COMPONENT DESCRIPTION

Electronic Components

The 5ET50 transmission contains the electronic components listed below: image Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump

image Control Solenoid Valve

image Drive Motor Assembly - 1st Position image Drive Motor Assembly - 2nd Position

image Manual Shift Detent Lever A/Trans Output Speed Sensor Assembly

This transmission is a fully automatic front wheel drive transaxle, and is an electronically-controlled continuously-

variable electric transmission. High voltage three phase circuits connect the 2 motor/generators and the electric automatic transmission fluid pump drive motor assembly, to the drive motor control modules. The high voltage electric automatic transmission fluid pump provides transmission fluid pressure.

Drive Motor Assembly (1st Position)


image


Fig. 290: Drive Motor Assembly (1st Position) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

500

Drive Motor Support

501

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator

502

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

503

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip

504

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt

505

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer

506

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing

507

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide

508

Drive Motor Stator - (1st Position)

509

Drive Motor Stator Bolt

510

Drive Motor Rotor - (1st Position)

Callout

Component Name

511

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring

The drive motor generator power inverter module controls the three permanent magnet 3-phase electric motors that are internal to the transmission, and perform the following functions:

image Torque for vehicle propulsion image Engine cranking

image Battery charging

image Regenerative Braking

image Transmission fluid pressure


Drive Motor Assembly (2nd Position)


image


Fig. 291: Drive Motor Assembly (2nd Position) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

520

Drive Motor Support

521

Drive Motor Position Sensor Stator

522

Drive Motor Position Sensor Bolt

Callout

Component Name

523

Drive Motor Position Sensor Connector Clip

524

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module 3-Phase Cable Bolt

525

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Retainer

526

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Bolt Install Guide Bushing

527

Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Cable Guide

528

Drive Motor Stator - (2nd Position)

529

Drive Motor Stator Bolt

530

Drive Motor Rotor - (2nd Position)

531

Drive Motor Rotor Bearing Retaining Ring

532

Output Sun Gear

533

Output Sun Gear Retaining Ring

The Drive Motor/Generator Description

Drive Motor Assembly (1st position) is a generator referred to as Drive Motor 1 on the scan tool and consists of a permanent magnet rotor with a distributed bar wound, NdFeB magnet stator capable of producing 55 kW of peak electrical energy and 138 N.m (102 lb ft).

Drive Motor Assembly (2nd position) is a traction motor referred to as Drive Motor 2 on the scan tool and consists of a permanent magnet rotor with a distributed bar wound, NdFeB magnet stator capable of producing 76 kW of peak electrical energy and 178 N.m (131 lb ft).

Both are actively cooled via transmission fluid. Drive Motor Assembly (1st position) is used to start the engine and maintain charge to the hybrid battery. Drive Motor Assembly (2nd position) propels the vehicle. Motor speeds are controlled and monitored by resolver-type position sensors. The drive motor position sensors are monitored by the motor control modules. The motor control modules monitor the angular position, speed and direction of the drive motor generator based upon the signals of these position sensors. The position sensor, or resolver, contains a drive coil, 2 driven coils and an irregular shaped metallic rotor. The metallic rotor is mechanically attached to the shaft of the drive motor generator. At ignition ON, the motor control module outputs a low AC voltage, 10 kHz excitation signal to the drive coil. The drive coil excitation signal creates a magnetic field surrounding the 2 driven coils and the irregular shaped rotor. The motor control module then monitors the 2 driven coil circuits for a return signal. The position of the irregular shaped metallic rotor causes the magnetically-induced return signals of the driven coils to vary in size and shape. A comparison of the 2 driven coils signals allows the motor control module to determine the exact angle, speed and direction of the drive motor generator. For more information on the drive motor function and system interaction refer to Drive Motor Power Inverter Module Description and Operation .

Automatic Transmission Fluid Pump

image


Fig. 292: Electric Auxiliary Pump Drive Motor Assembly Components Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

The electric automatic transmission fluid pump assembly is driven by high voltage AC which is controlled by the drive motor/generator power inverter module assembly. The purpose of the auxiliary fluid pump motor is to supply oil pressure to the transmission for lube, cooling and clutch application during vehicle propulsion. The automatic transmission fluid pump motor is commanded on when the propulsion system is active.

Control Solenoid Valve


The control solenoid valve assembly contains the following components:

Control Solenoid Valve Assembly

image


Fig. 293: Control Solenoid Valve Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Component Name

1

Transmission Fluid Temperature Sensor

2

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 2

3

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 5

4

Electrical Connector - 8 Pins

5

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 3

6

Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 4

These components are not serviced separately. The control solenoid valve bolts directly to the valve body within the transmission. The control solenoid assembly X1 connector connects to the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve.

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve


The line pressure solenoid control valve is located in the H bore of the control valve body assembly. The A - H bores are stamped on the control valve body assembly in order to aid in the locating the control valve body components.

The line pressure control solenoid valve is a variable force solenoid valve, this type of solenoid can increase or decrease the amount of pressurized fluid based on the amount of current applied to solenoid valve coil. The line pressure solenoid control valve is used to control transmission fluid pressure for clutch pressure, lube, and drive motor cooling.

Solenoid Characterization


The line pressure solenoid control valve is tested after assembly to determine the output fluid pressure at certain electrical current values, applied to coil windings. This information is referred to as solenoid current/pressure data points. The solenoid valves are tested two ways, with an increasing and decreasing electrical current applied to the

coil windings. The resultant current versus pressure data points are saved and assigned a file number. The file number is marked on the solenoid valve housing end. The performance data file is stored on the TIS web site. This data file is programmed and stored in the vehicle's hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. Replacing any of the following components will require the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 to be programmed with the new or existing solenoid valve performance data.

image Hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 - program the new hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 with the existing solenoid data files stored on the TIS web site for the line pressure solenoid control valve.

image Line pressure solenoid control valve - program the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 with the new solenoid data file stored on the TIS web site for the line pressure solenoid control valve.

image Control valve body assembly - program the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 with the existing solenoid data files stored on the TIS web site for the line pressure solenoid control valve.

image Line pressure solenoid control valve and control valve body as a complete assembly - program the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 with the new solenoid data file stored on the TIS web site for the line pressure solenoid control valve.

image Transmission Assembly - A new transmission assembly will have the solenoid characterization data programmed into the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1.


image


Fig. 294: Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY


Callout

Bore

Description

1

H Bore

Line Pressure Control Solenoid Valve

Manual Shift Detent Lever

image


Fig. 295: Internal Mode Switch (IMS) Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

The 5 electronic switches are called the transmission range switches and are used to indicate the gear position the vehicle operator has selected. The 5 outputs (A, B, C, P, S) are range selection inputs to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, through the Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Shift Shaft Position Switch. The manual shift detent lever assembly is mounted on the interior front of the transmission case above the control valve body assembly. The internal mode switch indicates to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 which gear position the vehicle operator has selected. The Internal Mode Switch consists of 5 separate hall effect switches. Each hall effect switch is supplied a 9 V reference circuit, and a signal circuit from the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. Each signal circuit for each gear selector position will have either a voltage reading of 0.70 - 0.96 V indicting ON or 1.68 -

2.38 V indicating OFF. The voltage values on each Internal Mode Switch circuit will change and are dependent on the position of the gear selector. The state of each Internal Mode Switch A/B/C/P/S circuit is displayed on the scan tool.

Output Speed Sensor (OSS)

image


Fig. 296: Output Speed Sensor (OSS) Assembly Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

The output speed sensor assembly has 2 internal hall-effect type sensors, and is capable of sensing both speed and direction. The output speed sensor mounts to the A/Trans case assembly and is connected to the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 through Automatic Transmission Wiring Harness - Control Solenoid Valve. The sensor faces the front differential drive pinion (w/transfer gear) gear assembly machined teeth surface. The sensor receives

8.3 - 9.3 volts on the OSS supply voltage circuit from the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1. As the output shaft rotates, the sensor produces a signal frequency based on the machined surface of the output shaft.

The two sensor elements in the output speed sensor assembly are spaced approximately 1/2 a tooth apart.

image When the vehicle is moving in a forward direction, sensor A detects a particular tooth before sensor B. image When the vehicle is moving in a reverse direction, sensor B detects a particular tooth before sensor A.

The electronics in the sensor combine the two signals and send a signal with a different pulse width. This signal is interpreted by the hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 for speed and direction and is transmitted through the serial data circuits to the ECM. The ECM and hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1, compare the output speed sensor signal with the anti-lock brake system wheel speed sensor signal. The hybrid/EV powertrain control module 1 also compares the output shaft direction with the drive motor 1 and drive motor 2 direction.

PARK ENGINE OFF

When the gear selector lever is in the Park (P) position and the internal combustion engine is OFF, the fluid pump is commanded ON and line pressure is directed to the pressure regulator valve and other various components. The following steady-state conditions exist in the transmission's hydraulic and electrical systems.

Fluid Pressure Directed In Preparation For A Shift


Line Fluid Circuit

Line fluid from the automatic transmission fluid pump supplies constant fluid flow to various components such as the line pressure regulating valve, line pressure control solenoid, variable high clutch dam feed regulator valve, shift solenoid 2, shift solenoid 3, shift solenoid 4, shift solenoid 5, variable low clutch valve, variable high clutch valve and dampener bypass clutch valve. Line pressure is controlled by the HPCM by varying electrical current supplied to the line pressure control solenoid dependent on transmission operating conditions.

Variable Low Clutch Applies


Shift Solenoid 3

The shift solenoid 3 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 3 signal circuit. Solenoid 3 signal fluid is then routed to the variable low clutch valve.

Variable Low Clutch Valve

Solenoid 3 signal fluid, at the variable low clutch valve, opposes variable low clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the variable low clutch fluid circuit.

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #8 through the variable low clutch valve and into the variable low clutch circuit. Variable low clutch fluid passes through the variable low clutch housing and moves the variable low clutch piston against spring force to apply the variable low clutch.

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

Variable low clutch fluid is also sent to the variable low clutch accumulator piston. Variable low clutch fluid moves the variable low clutch accumulator piston against accumulator spring force to cushion apply of the variable low clutch assembly.

Torque Dampener Clutch Applies


Shift Solenoid 5

The shift solenoid 5 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 5 signal circuit. Solenoid 5 signal fluid is then routed to the dampener bypass clutch valve.

Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

Solenoid 5 signal fluid, at the dampener bypass clutch valve, opposes dampener bypass clutch valve spring force to supply line pressure into the dampener bypass clutch circuit.

Torque Damper Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #12 through the damper bypass clutch valve and into the damper bypass clutch circuit. Damper bypass clutch fluid passes through the automatic transmission case and automatic transmission torque damper and differential housing and moves the torque damper bypass clutch piston against spring force to apply the automatic transmission torque damper in preparation for an engine start.

Lube boost is available


Shift Solenoid 4

Shift solenoid 4 (Lube Boost) is commanded ON based on torque and temperature inputs to the HPCM. The shift solenoid 4 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 4 signal circuit. Solenoid 4 signal fluid is then routed through orifice #4 to the lube regulator valve elevating lube and motor cooling pressure and flow.

Park Engine Off

image

Fig. 297: Park Engine Off - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

PARK ENGINE ON

If the HPCM determines that operating conditions (low state of battery charge, low temperature) are appropriate for the internal combustion engine (ICE) to be ON in Park, the fluid pump is commanded ON and line pressure is directed to the pressure regulator valve and other various components. The following steady-state conditions exist in the transmission's hydraulic electrical systems. Note that the torque damper assembly is commanded ON only during the start sequence and is OFF once the ICE is ON.

Fluid Pressure Directed in Preparation for a Shift


Line Fluid Circuit

Line fluid from the automatic transmission fluid pump supplies constant fluid flow to various components such as the line pressure regulating valve, line pressure control solenoid, variable high clutch dam feed regulator valve, shift solenoid 2, shift solenoid 3, shift solenoid 4, shift solenoid 5, variable low clutch valve, variable high clutch valve and dampener bypass clutch valve. Line pressure is controlled by the HPCM by varying electrical current supplied to the line pressure control solenoid dependent on transmission operating conditions.

Variable Low Clutch Applies


Shift Solenoid 3

The shift solenoid 3 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the Solenoid 3 signal circuit. Solenoid 3 signal fluid is then routed to the variable low clutch valve.

Variable Low Clutch Valve

Solenoid 3 signal fluid, at the variable low clutch valve, opposes variable low clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the variable low clutch fluid circuit.

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #8 through the variable low clutch valve and into the variable low clutch circuit. Variable low clutch fluid passes through the variable low clutch housing and moves the variable low clutch piston against spring force to apply the variable low clutch.

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

Variable low clutch fluid is also sent to the variable low clutch accumulator piston. Variable low clutch fluid moves the variable low clutch accumulator piston against accumulator spring force to cushion apply of the variable low clutch assembly.

Lube Boost Is Available


Shift Solenoid 4

Shift solenoid 4 (Lube Boost) is commanded ON based on torque and temperature inputs to the HPCM. The shift solenoid 4 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the Solenoid 4 signal circuit. Solenoid 4 signal fluid is then routed through orifice #4 to the lube regulator valve elevating lube and motor cooling pressure and flow.

Park Engine ON


image


Fig. 298: Park Engine ON - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

NEUTRAL ENGINE OFF

When the gear selector lever is in the Neutral (N) position and the internal combustion engine is OFF, the fluid pump is commanded ON and line pressure is directed to the pressure regulator valve and other various components. If Neutral is selected after the vehicle was operating in Reverse EV Mode or Drive Single Motor EV Mode, the variable low clutch releases and the torque damper clutch stays applied.

Fluid Pressure Directed In Preparation For A Shift


Line Fluid Circuit

Line fluid from the automatic transmission fluid pump supplies constant fluid flow to various components such as the line pressure regulating valve, line pressure control solenoid, variable high clutch dam feed regulator valve, shift solenoid 2, shift solenoid 3, shift solenoid 4, shift solenoid 5, variable low clutch valve, variable high clutch valve and dampener bypass clutch valve. Line pressure is controlled by the HPCM by varying electrical current supplied to the line pressure control solenoid dependent on transmission operating conditions.

Variable Low Clutch Releases


Shift Solenoid 3

The shift solenoid 3 is commanded OFF, allowing Solenoid 3 signal fluid to exhaust from the variable low clutch valve.

Variable Low Clutch Valve

Variable low clutch valve spring force moves the variable low clutch valve to the released position, allowing variable low clutch accumulator fluid and variable low clutch pressure to exhaust.

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

Variable low clutch fluid pressure is exhausted from the variable low clutch accumulator piston. Accumulator spring force moves the variable low clutch piston accumulator to the released position.

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Variable low clutch fluid pressure is exhausted from the clutch assembly, allowing variable low clutch spring force to move the variable low clutch to the OFF position.

Torque Dampener Clutch Applies


Shift Solenoid 5

The shift solenoid 5 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 5 signal circuit. Solenoid 5 signal fluid is then routed to the dampener bypass clutch valve.

Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

Solenoid 5 signal fluid, at the damper bypass clutch valve, opposes damper bypass clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the damper bypass clutch fluid circuit.

Torque Damper Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #12 through the damper bypass clutch valve and into the damper bypass clutch circuit. Damper bypass clutch fluid passes through the automatic transmission case and automatic transmission torque damper and differential housing and moves the torque damper bypass clutch piston against spring force to

apply the automatic transmission torque damper in preparation for an engine start.

Lube Boost Is Available


Shift Solenoid 4

Shift solenoid 4 (Lube Boost) is commanded ON based on torque and temperature inputs to the HPCM. The shift solenoid 4 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 4 signal circuit. Solenoid 4 signal fluid is then routed through orifice #4 to the lube regulator valve elevating lube and motor cooling pressure and flow.

Neutral Engine Off


image


Fig. 299: Neutral Engine Off - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

REVERSE EV MODE ENGINE OFF

When the gear selector lever is moved to the Reverse (R) position (from the Park position), and the internal combustion engine (ICE) is OFF, the following steady-state conditions exist in the transmission's hydraulic and electrical systems.

Fluid Pressure Directed In Preparation For A Shift


Line Fluid Circuit

Line fluid from the automatic transmission fluid pump supplies constant fluid flow to various components such as the line pressure regulating valve, line pressure control solenoid, variable high clutch dam feed regulator valve, shift solenoid 2, shift solenoid 3, shift solenoid 4, shift solenoid 5, variable low clutch valve, variable high clutch valve and dampener bypass clutch valve. Line pressure is controlled by the HPCM by varying electrical current supplied to the line pressure control solenoid dependent on transmission operating conditions.

Variable Low Clutch Applied


Shift Solenoid 3

The shift solenoid 3 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the Solenoid 3 signal circuit. Solenoid 3 signal fluid is then routed to the variable low clutch valve.

Variable Low Clutch Valve

Solenoid 3 signal fluid, at the variable low clutch valve, opposes variable low clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the variable low clutch fluid circuit.

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #8 through the variable low clutch valve and into the variable low clutch circuit. Variable low clutch fluid passes through the variable low clutch housing and moves the variable low clutch piston against spring force to apply the variable low clutch.

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

Variable low clutch fluid is also sent to the variable low clutch accumulator piston. Variable low clutch fluid moves the variable low clutch accumulator piston against accumulator spring force to cushion apply of the variable low clutch assembly.

Torque Dampener Clutch Applied


Shift Solenoid 5

The shift solenoid 5 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the Solenoid 5 signal circuit. Solenoid 5 signal fluid is then routed to the dampener bypass clutch valve.

Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

Solenoid 5 signal fluid, at the dampener bypass clutch valve, opposes dampener bypass clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the dampener bypass clutch fluid circuit.

Torque Damper Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #12 through the damper bypass clutch valve and into the damper bypass clutch circuit. Damper bypass clutch fluid passes through the automatic transmission case and automatic transmission torque damper and differential housing and moves the torque damper bypass clutch piston against spring force to apply the automatic transmission torque damper in preparation for an engine start.

Lube Boost Is Available


Shift Solenoid 4

Shift solenoid 4 (Lube Boost) is commanded ON based on torque and temperature inputs to the HPCM. When required, shift solenoid 4 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 4 signal circuit. Solenoid 4 signal fluid is then routed through orifice #4 to the lube regulator valve elevating lube and motor cooling pressure and flow.

Reverse EV Mode Engine Off

image

Fig. 300: Reverse EV Mode Engine Off - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

DRIVE SINGLE OR DUAL MOTOR EV ENGINE OFF

When the gear selector lever is in the Drive (D) position and the internal combustion engine (ICE) is OFF, the fluid pump is commanded ON and line pressure is directed to the pressure regulator valve and other various components. The following steady-state conditions exist in the transmission's hydraulic and electrical systems. If Drive (D) was selected after the vehicle was operating in Reverse EV Mode or Park (Engine off), the variable low clutch and the torque damper clutch stay applied.

Fluid Pressure Directed In Preparation For A Shift


Line Fluid Circuit

Line fluid from the automatic transmission fluid pump supplies constant fluid flow to various components such as the line pressure regulating valve, line pressure control solenoid, variable high clutch dam feed regulator valve, shift solenoid 2, shift solenoid 3, shift solenoid 4, shift solenoid 5, variable low clutch valve, variable high clutch valve and dampener bypass clutch valve. Line pressure is controlled by the HPCM by varying electrical current supplied to the line pressure control solenoid dependent on transmission operating conditions.

Variable Low Clutch Applied


Shift Solenoid 3

The shift solenoid 3 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 3 signal circuit. Solenoid 3 signal fluid is then routed to the variable low clutch valve.

Variable Low Clutch Valve

Solenoid 3 signal fluid, at the variable low clutch valve, opposes variable low clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the variable low clutch fluid circuit.

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

Variable low clutch fluid is also sent to the variable low clutch accumulator piston. Variable low clutch fluid moves the variable low clutch accumulator piston against accumulator spring force to cushion apply of the variable low clutch assembly.

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #8 through the variable low clutch valve and into the variable low clutch circuit. Variable low clutch fluid passes through the variable low clutch housing and moves the variable low clutch piston against spring force to apply the variable low clutch.

Torque Dampener Clutch Applied


Shift Solenoid 5

The shift solenoid 5 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 5 signal circuit. Solenoid 5 signal fluid is then routed to the dampener bypass clutch valve.

Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

Solenoid 5 signal fluid, at the damper bypass clutch valve, opposes damper bypass clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the damper bypass clutch fluid circuit.

Torque Damper Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #12 through the damper bypass clutch valve and into the damper bypass clutch circuit. Damper bypass clutch fluid passes through the automatic transmission case and automatic transmission torque damper and differential housing and moves the torque damper bypass clutch piston against spring force to apply the automatic transmission torque damper in preparation for an engine start.

Lube Boost Is Available


Shift Solenoid 4

Shift solenoid 4 (Lube Boost) is commanded ON based on torque and temperature inputs to the HPCM. When required, shift solenoid 4 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the solenoid 4 signal circuit. Solenoid 4 signal fluid is then routed through orifice #4 to the lube regulator valve elevating lube and motor cooling pressure and flow.

Drive Single or Dual Motor EV Engine Off

image

Fig. 301: Drive Single Or Dual Motor EV Engine Off - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

DRIVE EXTENDED RANGE LOW ENGINE ON

When the gear selector lever is in the Drive (D) position and the HPCM determines that operating conditions are appropriate, the internal combustion engine (ICE) is started, the main fluid pump provides hydraulic fluid pressure. If Drive (D) is selected after the vehicle was operating in Reverse EV Mode or Park (Engine off), the variable low clutch stays applied. After Engine Start, the following changes would occur to the transmission's hydraulic and electrical systems in order to start the vehicle moving from a stopped position.

Torque Dampener Clutch Releases


Shift Solenoid 5

The shift solenoid 5 is commanded OFF, allowing Solenoid 5 signal fluid to exhaust from the dampener bypass clutch valve.

Dampener Bypass Clutch Valve

Dampener bypass clutch valve spring force moves the dampener bypass clutch valve to the released position, allowing dampener bypass clutch fluid pressure to exhaust.

Torque Dampener Assembly

Dampener bypass clutch fluid exhausts from the torque dampener clutch assembly through the dampener bypass clutch valve allowing the torque dampener clutch to release.

Drive Extended Range Low Engine On

image

Fig. 302: Drive Extended Range Low Engine On - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

DRIVE EXTENDED RANGE HIGH ENGINE ON

When the gear selector lever is in the Drive (D) position and the HPCM determines that operating conditions are appropriate, the internal combustion engine (ICE) is started, the main fluid pump provides hydraulic fluid pressure. If the transmission is operating in extended range fixed gear ratio and the HPCM determines that operating conditions are appropriate for a shift to extended range high, the following changes would occur to the transmission's hydraulic and electrical systems.

Variable Low Clutch Releases


Shift Solenoid 3

The shift solenoid 3 is commanded OFF, allowing Solenoid 3 signal fluid to exhaust from the variable low clutch valve.

Variable Low Clutch Valve

Variable low clutch valve spring force moves the variable low clutch valve to the released position, allowing variable low clutch accumulator fluid pressure to exhaust.

Variable Low Clutch Accumulator Piston

Variable low clutch fluid pressure is exhausted from the variable low clutch accumulator piston. Accumulator spring force moves the variable low clutch piston accumulator to the released position.

Variable Low Clutch Assembly

Variable low clutch fluid pressure is exhausted from the clutch assembly, allowing variable low clutch spring force to move the variable low clutch to the OFF position.

Drive Extended Range High Engine On


image


Fig. 303: Drive Extended Range High Engine On - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

DRIVE EXTENDED RANGE FIXED RATIO ENGINE ON

When the gear selector lever is in the Drive (D) position and the HPCM determines that operating conditions are appropriate, the internal combustion engine (ICE) is started, the main fluid pump provides hydraulic fluid pressure. If the transmission is operating in extended range low (mode 1) and the HPCM determines that operating conditions are appropriate for a shift to extended range fixed ratio, the following changes would occur to the transmission's hydraulic and electrical systems.

Variable High Clutch Applies


Shift Solenoid 2

The shift solenoid 2 is energized ON, allowing line fluid to enter the Solenoid 2 signal circuit. Solenoid 2 signal fluid is then routed to the variable high clutch valve.

Variable High Clutch Valve

Solenoid 2 signal fluid, at the variable high clutch valve, opposes variable high clutch valve spring force to supply line fluid pressure into the variable high clutch fluid circuit. This also allows compensator feed fluid to exhaust through the variable high clutch valve exhausting the variable high clutch dam.

Variable High Clutch Assembly

Line fluid is routed through orifice #9 through the variable high clutch valve and into the variable high clutch fluid circuit. Variable high clutch fluid passes through the transmission case and variable high clutch housing and moves the variable high clutch piston against spring force to apply the variable high clutch.

Drive Extended Range Fixed Ratio Engine On


image

Fig. 304: Drive Extended Range Fixed Ratio Engine On - Hydraulic Flow Diagram Courtesy of GENERAL MOTORS COMPANY

SPECIAL TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

SPECIAL TOOLS



Illustration

Tool Number/Description


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


CH-51999

Volt Cradle Bushing Remover/Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-8092 GE-8092

Drive Handle


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-03289-20

Holding Fixture Base Assembly


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-23129

Universal Seal Remover


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-45201

Seal Remover


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-46625

Holding Fixture


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-46625-20

Holding Fixture Adapters


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-46629-A

Axle Seal Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-47694

Piston Spring Compressor


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-48008

Press Support/Pinion Bearing Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-48903

Spring Compressor


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-49938

Differential Rotating Tool


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-50301

Seal Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description

image


DT-50900

Clutch Travel Support Fixture


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-50903

Clutch Travel Load Gauge


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-50905

Clutch Air Travel Adapter


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-50911

Seal Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51436

Manual Shaft Pin Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51621

Rotor Remover/Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51622

Seal Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51623

Motor Lift Bar


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51625-1

Bearing Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51624

Alignment Pins


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51626

Seal Protector


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51627

Clutch Travel Air Adapter


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51628

Clutch Holder


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51654

Dampener Holder


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51669

Protector


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51672

Seal Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


DT-51700

Seal Installer


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


EL-35616

Terminal Test Kit


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


EL-38522

Variable Signal Generator


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


EN-21867-A

Pressure Gauge


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


EN-45059 J-45059

Angle Meter


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-23129

Universal Seal Removal


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-6125-1B

Slide Hammer with Adapter


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-8092

Driver Handle


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-48494 J-48494

Power Electronics Pressure Test Adapter Kit


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-48494-10

Pressure Tester Kit


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-7057 J-7057

Dial Indicator Extension


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


GE-8001 J-8001

Dial Indicator Set


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


J-23327-1

Clutch Spring Compressor (Bridge)


Illustration

Tool Number/Description


image


J-24460-01

Cooling System Pressure Tester


image


image